Home

Manual PDF

1. 2 Specify GVRP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 13 1 The GVRP Global Configuration Refresh GVRP Mode Port GVRP Mode GVRP rrole Disable Disable v Disab Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable s Disable v Disabl Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Y Disable Disable v Disable Disable v 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9A 0A 9B 0B Parameter description GVRP Mode GVRP Mode is a global setting To enable the GVRP globally select Enable from the menu and to disable GVRP globally select Disable Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure per port GVRP settings There are three configuration settings which can be configured on per port basis e GVRP Mode e GVRP Role 1 GVRP Mode This configuration is to enable disable GVRP Mode on a particular port locally e Disable Select to Disable GVRP mode on this port Enable Select to Enable GVRP mode on this port The default value of configuration is disable 2 GVRP Role This configuration is used to configure restricted role on an interface e Disable Select to Disable GVRP role on this port Enable Select to Enable GVRP role on this port The default configuration is disable Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh i
2. Inventory O aK WO PY 7 Reserved e Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The possible application types are shown below 1 Voice For use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by way of isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signaling For use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media 3 Guest Voice To support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signaling For use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media 5 Softphone Voice For use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops 6 Video Conferencing For use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video For use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that
3. LU Reteh Information Model Name System Description Location Contact Device Name System Date System Uptime Le ao al el BIOS Version a hl al Firmware Version Ee Hardware Mechanical Version Series Number Host IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Host MAC Address Console Baudrate RAM Size Flash Size Bridge FDB Size Transmit Queue Maximum Frame Size System Information Help Windows Internet Ex de hep 11192 166 20 22 helpihelp_sys htm ix Ss El g x E sie Favorites E 5 H suggested sites J Free Hotmail En 7 5 am Pager Safety Tools PZ The switch system information is provided here The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location The MAC Address ofthis switch The Chip ID of this switch The current GMT svetem time and date The svctem time sal Sg Rioo 2 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 CONNECTING NETWORK DEVICES TWISTED PAIR DEVICES CABLING GUIDELINES The switch is designed to be connected to 10 100 or 1000Mbps network cards in PCs and servers as well as to other switches and hubs It may also be connected to remote devices using optional SFP transceivers Each dev
4. The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port The port number to which the configuration below applies Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 10
5. 2 Unaware 3 Unaware KI blr ii Unaware l i i Unaware K Unaware i Unaware ali gt i ca aaa a aaa a a aaa Unaware Hybrid x Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid x Hybrid Hybrid_ vw Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid Y Hybrid Hybrid x Hybrid Y Hybrid Y Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid Y Hybrid Hybrid v Hybrid KE Unaware Unaware gt Unaware i i les Unaware rjj i Unaware Unaware Unaware Unaware N ee Unaware Unaware SESE ESSE rllz ii lt lt EIE Unaware Kiis P P gt i i Unaware Unaware ESE Unaware Unaware Unaware Unaware x 26 Unaware Y Ss 2 gt gt ii L Es 2 EES Parameter description e Ethertype for Custom S ports This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S ports while s custom port enabled This is a global setting for all the Custom S ports Custom Ethertype enables the user to change the Ethertype value on a port to any value in order to support network devices which do not use the standard 0x8100 Ethertype field value on 802 1Q tagged or 802 1p tagged frames Port Indicates the port number of each port Port Type Port can be one of the following types Unaware C por
6. 6 Click Save Will show following Policy Port Configuration 7 Select Policy ID for each port 8 Click Save Figure 3 8 3 The LLDP MED Configuration Fast start repeat count Latitude Norn Longitude East Atitude 0 eters v AP Emergency Call Service Add new policy 106 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Policies Delete Policy ID Application Type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP 0 Voice Tagged 1 0 0 Delete 1 Voice Tagged v 1 0 0 Parameter description Fast Start Repeat Count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity De
7. If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 20 Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Mirror Configuration is to monitor the traffic of the network For example we assume that Ports A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port respectively Thus the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for monitoring Web Interface To configure the Mirroring function in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Mirroring 2 Scroll to select Port to mirror on which port 3 Scroll to select Disabled Enable TX Only and RX Only to set the Port mirror Mode 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 20 1 The Mirror Configuration Port to mirror on Disabled Y 9A 10A 9B E 10B Disabled Mode 1 Disabled
8. The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote ID The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID Client Statistics e Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from server to client e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers e Receive from Client The number of received packets from server 208 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Receive Agent Option The number of received packets with relay agent information option Replace Agent Option The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option Keep Agent Option The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click the Refresh button to refresh the DHCP Relay Statistics manually Click the Clear button to clear the entries 4 5 NAS Network Access Server This section describes how to configure the NAS parameters of the switch The NAS server can be employed to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access conference calls printing documents on shared printers or by simply logging on to the Internet 4 5 1 Configuration
9. button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 9 The DSCP Classification Configuration DSCP Classification QoS Class DPL DSCP il gt lt gt vw 0 0 0 BE 0 1 0 BE 1 0 0 BE y 1 Ao 65 S 2 0 0 BE M 2 1 0 BE vi 3 0 0 Be 3 1 0 BE 4 0 0 BE v 4 1 0 BE v 5 fo BE el 5 1 0 BE w 6 0 0 BE M 6 1 0 BE v 7 Oo BE A 7 1 0 BE Parameter description e QoS Class Available QoS Class values range from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to the following parameters DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes e DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 166 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 14 10 QoS Control List Configuration This section explains the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list Web Interface To configure the QoS Control List parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QoS Control List 2 Click the M4 to add a new QoS Control List 3 Scroll all parameters and select the Port Member to join the QCE rules 4 Click Save
10. 00 00 00 00 0 00 DODODODODODO Delete VLAN ID erai Ad Parameter description e Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds for example 500 seconds The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking Disable Automatic Aging MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done eo Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode Otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address e Delete
11. 2 Disabled x 3 Disabled v 4 Disabled v 5 Disabled 6 Disabled 7 Disabled x 8 Disabled v Disabled s Parameter description Port to mirror on Port to mirror is also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row eo Mode 190 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Select the mirror mode Rx only frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port Gi Norte For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this the mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx Only e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 21 Trap Event Severity This function is used to set an Alarm trap and get the Event log The Trap Events Configuration functio
12. Figure 3 5 5 The IGMP Snooping Groups Information 1005 mi 020 53 ES poso bla Port Members VLANID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 10A 98 108 Parameter description Navigating the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table They will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table IGMP Group Table Columns eo VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh Select the auto refresh icon to refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Group Status manually The other are for next up page or entry 84 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 5 6 IPv4 SSM information Source Specific Multicast SSM is a datagram delivery model that best supports one to many applications also known as broadcast applications SSM is a core network technology of IP multicast targeted for audio and video broadcast application environments For the SSM delivery mode an IP multicast receiver host must use IGMP Version 3 IGMPv3 to subscribe to channel S G By subscribing to this channel the receiver host is indicating that it wants to receive IP multicast traffic sent
13. The VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID Currently the following VLAN user types are supported Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVRP Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP allows dynamic registration and de registration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP allows dynamic registration and de registration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment eo VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selec
14. This section allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMPv6 PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMPv6 PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 2 The ICMPv6 Ping 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e IP Address The destination IP Address you want to ping e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds 254 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 5 5 3 VeriPHY This section is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY Therefore running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete Web Interface To configure a VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port you want to check 2 Click
15. UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components Web Interface To configure the UPnP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration UPnP 2 Scroll to select the mode to Enable or Disable 3 Specify the parameters in each blank field 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the setting then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 23 1 The UPnP Configuration UPnP Configuration Mode Disabled TTL 4 Advertising Duration 100 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the UPnP Configuration page e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enables UPnP mode operation Disabled Disables UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to the CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled 0 TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive an SSDP adverti
16. 3 29 UPN PS A AA AAA A ias 195 CHAPTER 4 SECURITY iii AA NA AE AT AE e 196 4 1 TP SOURCE GUARDA tit 196 4 1 Config r tiot esusu A A A ad 196 ALS CARAC LADLE A A A T eA 198 4 13 Dynamic Table a tac 199 42 ARPAINSPECTION Tas a ias 200 A AAA A chee Be ends Rens oie iE Deets deg TE a E iE onic E E E R A Wena texe 200 4 22 Slate lable saan a a e a eves eve ae a bn ve a Eea ES 201 4 23 Dynamic Table vererien enen eiea oii Dia a a iE e aea RE E ein T E S 202 4 3 SSDHCPSNOOPING dies 203 SR ANA siie iese i Be onsen Dens Hed Be be es eae neds oat Se ected SEa D ieee Ra 203 AS D SUALUSTUCS co cs a SB E dese ass a Be ves Paes Hea Bee a E Se OES 204 AA TDHCP REBAY d be fics aaa aee bess ba ics a toh 206 ABT COMP SUL ALON cass osc te Bests se nde aa Ei E Deans Heb ga sb ve yeaa HS coat Sh swe a in Bonde e aiaa 206 AA Di SUALUSTLCS SA sce Soca wei ee aE ian Bo IA A eB A 208 4 5 NAS NETWORK ACCESS SERVER ds 210 ADA Confituur loh ra 210 PENA E SIAUUS bi eB soi IR Es BE REE a8 OE Ec BEE SERRE BS REIS 218 ES IL Y A RO 220 AEG ADA Fscecpaccttescrce a patcaun de veied Sais svacaun veya h stl sae san iors ea Sea svecaca or dbhsaut eat avedenced a aa a aa 223 4 6 T CONPIQUTALION Ai 223 AOL RADIUS OVETVICW 55503 soe oo DRE AEE si 227 4 6 3 RADIUS DCIS asi 229 4 7 PORT SECURITY bt 233 AST A Limit Contro a e a EER RE E e EE Bei a aE 233 BEATA AE ISI O DEE EE EES EEE SPER AE ASAE BAA 236 43 PO SALUS 35 bE E EES A VARESE NRE iE rs SR ioe 238 4 8 ACCESS MANAG
17. Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto Negotiation Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link C cc CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is an MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is an OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol D DEI DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete descr
18. Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry e Adding a New Static Entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC Address and Port Members for the new entry Click Save e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 120 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 9 2 Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC Address Web Interface To Display MAC Address Table in the web interface 1 Click Dynamic MAC Table 2 Specify the VLAN and MAC Address 3 Display MAC Address Table Figure 3 9 2 The Dynamic MAC Address Table Information x 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port Members Type VLAN MAC Address cru 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 o9 10 11 12 Static 1 00 01 C1 00 00 00 y Dynamic 1 00 25 22 10 70 F5 en Static 1 33 33 FF 00 02 01 v Static 1 33 33 FF AB C0 E2 y Static 1 ERRERERRERER ll A A Parameter description MAC Table Columns e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry o VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC addr
19. EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device have all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange information about the devices wakeup time using the LLDP protocol For maximizing the power saving the circuit isn t started as soon as transmit data are ready for a port but is instead queued until 3000 bytes of data are ready to be transmitted To avoid introducing a large delay in case that data less than 3000 bytes is to be transmitted data are always transmitted after 48 us giving a maximum latency of 48 us the wakeup time If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue done with QOS and then marking the queue as an urgent queue When an urgent queue gets data to be transmitted the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time Web Interface To configure the EEE Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then EEE 2 Select which ports are to be enabled for the EEE function 3 Select the desired level for EEE Urgent Queues
20. Mon2 TX PWR none Mon3 RX PWR none Parameter description e Connector Type Displays the connector type for instance UTP SC ST LC and so on eo Fiber Type Displays the fiber mode for instance Multi Mode Single Mode e Tx Central Wavelength Displays the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength for instance 850nm 1310nm 1550nm and so on o Baud Rate Displays the maximum baud rate of the fiber module supported for instance 10M 100M 1G and so on e Vendor OUI Displays the manufacturer s OUI code which is assigned by IEEE e Vendor Name Displays the company name of the module manufacturer e Vendor P N 42 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Displays the product name assigned by the module manufacturer Vendor Rev Revision Displays the module revision Vendor SN Serial Number Shows the serial number assigned by the manufacturer Date Code Shows the date this SFP module was made Temperature Shows the current temperature of the SFP module Vcc Shows the working DC voltage of the SFP module Mon1 Bias mA Shows the Bias current of the SFP module Mon2 TX PWR Shows the transmit power of the SFP module Mon3 RX PWR Shows the receiver power of the SFP module 3 1 7 EEE This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current EEE port settings EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is very low traffic utilization or no traffic
21. Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Private VLAN Click to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the private VLAN can be configured as needed eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 10 5 2 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides for an apparatus and method to isolate ports on Layer 2 switches on the same VLAN in order to restrict traffic flow The apparatus comprises a switch having said plurality of ports each port configured as a protected port or a non protected port An address table memory stores an address table having a destination address and port number pair A forwarding map generator generates a forwarding map which is responsive to a destination address of a data packet The method for isolating ports on a Layer 2 switch comprises configuring each of the ports on the Layer 2 switch as a protected port or a non protected port A destination address on a data packet is matched with a physical address on said Layer 2 switch and a forwarding map is generated for the data packet based upon the destination address on the data packet The data packet is th
22. Scroll to enable or disable the Port Security function on the Port If you turn on the function then you need to set Port Security limit to allow how many device can access the port via MAC address Port Security Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port the port is shut down This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new address will be learned Port Security limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses Spanning Tree Admin Edge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized Spanning Tree BPDU Guard
23. This section describes how to configure NAS settings of IEEE 802 1X MAC based authentication system and port settings The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Network Access Server in the web interface OODNOARWN gt Check Guest VLAN Enabled 10 Specify Guest VLAN ID 11 Specify Max Reauth Count 12 Check Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen 13 Click Save Figure 4 5 1 The Network Access Server Configuration Mode Disabled el Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period EAPOL Timeout Aging Period Hold Time RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN ID Max Reauth Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest ASES VLAN Enabled VLAN Enabled QoS Enabled Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized 5 Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized E 160 66 0 E ENNE EEA Force Authorized seconds seconds seconds seconds Port State Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Glo
24. deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries Web Interface To configure MAC address based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click MAC address based VLAN configuration and Add new entry 2 Specify the MAC address and VLAN ID 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 6 1 The MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 42 Currently no entries present Add new entry Save Port Members Delete MAC Address VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 10A 98 108 Delete 00 00 00 00 00 00 1000000000000 Sar Reset Parameter description O Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted on the selected switch e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New MAC based VLAN Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry
25. 10000 GVRP Y VLAN nomal participant v 2 200 600 10000 GVRP vLan normal participant Y 3 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 4 200 600 10000 GVRP iv VLAN Y normal participant v 5 200 600 10000 GVRP il VLAN vw normal participant y 6 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN vw normal participant w 7 200 600 10000 GVRP Y VLAN normal participant Y a 200 600 10000 GVRP Y VLAN normal participant Y 9 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant_ 10 200 00 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 11 200 T600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 12 200 600 10000 GVRP Y VLAN normal participant v Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure GARP settings There are 2 types of configuration settings which can be configured on a per port basis e Timer Values e Application e Attribute Type 144 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 e GARP Applicant Timer Values To set the GARP join timer leave timer and leave all timers units are in Micro seconds Three different timers can be configured on this page Join Timer The default value for Join timer is 200ms Leave Timer The range of values for Leave Time is 600 1000ms The default value for Leave Timer is 600ms Leave All Timer The default value for Leave All Timer is 10000ms Application
26. 3 As each connection is made the Link LED on the switch corresponding to each port will light green 1000 Mbps or amber 100 Mbps to indicate that the connection is valid NoTE Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hu NETWORK WIRING CONNECTIONS Today the punch down block is an integral part of many of the newer equipment racks It is actually part of the patch panel Instructions for making connections in the wiring closet with this type of equipment are as follows Step 1 Attach one end of a patch cable to an available port on the switch and the other end to the patch panel Step 2 If not already in place attach one end of a cable segment to the back of the patch panel where the punch down block is located and the other end to a modular wall outlet Step 3 Label the cables to simplify future troubleshooting See Cable Labeling and Connection Records on page 29 Figure 17 Network Wiring Connections Equipment Rack Switch side view ON E Y j lo DEA E ll o N E o a Patch Down Block Patch Panel Wall uma s A e 3 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 System Configuration This chapter describes all the basic configuration tasks which includes the System Information and any management features of the SG726
27. 4 TP 100 1G SFP Combo 2 100 16 SFP L2 Plus Managed Switch GEL2 ESW26K 2011 01 01 00 27 18 Od 00 27 18 1 00 v1 34 vi 01 v1 01 033908000002 192 168 6 127 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 D0 40 c7 17 28 39 115200 64MB 16MB 8192 MAC Addresses 8 queues per port 9600 4 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Parameter description e Model name The model name of this device On most screens this will display the software development model number which is GEL2 ESW26K The actual model number is SG72660M System description As it is this tells what this device is Here it is 20 Port 10 100 1000Base T 4 TP 100 1G SFP Combo 2 100 1G SFP L2 Plus Managed Switch e Location Basically it is the location where this switch is placed User defined e Contact For easily managing and maintaining the switch you may want to record the contact person and phone here You can configure this parameter through the device s user interface or SNMP e Device name The name of the switch User defined e System Date Displays the current system time and date The field format is YYYY MM DD HH MM SS e System up time The time accumulated since the switch is powered up The format is day hour minute second e BIOS version The version of the BIOS in this switch e Firmware version The firmware version in this switch e Hardware Mechanical versions The versions of Hardware and Mechanical The figure
28. 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm using cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Mirroring MLD MVR NAS For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPV6 instead of using a separate protocol Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network Instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials
29. Address User IP address of the entry e Auto refresh Select the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click to refresh the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table manually Others are for next up page or entry 202 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 4 3 ssDHCP Snooping This section describes how to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network 4 3 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure the DHCP Snooping settings including Snooping Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Mode Configuration Trusted Untrusted Web Interface To configure DHCP Snooping in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode for DHCP Snooping Configuration 2 Select Trusted for the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Save Figure 4 3 1 The DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Disabled vw Mode Untrusted Untrusted rt 1 2 3 4 5 6 E 8 Untrusted Untrusted Y Untrusted v Untrusted Untrusted Parameter description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enables the DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the DHCP request messages will
30. Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1 X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest
31. Down Shutdown Enabled Down Shutdown Enabled Down Shutdown Enabled Down Shutdown Enabled Down 2 3 4 5 6 j 8 9 ooooccc co oO O oh o Parameter description eo Port The switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action e Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode e Loops The number of loops detected on this port eo Status The current loop protection status of the port e Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port e Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected eo Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto Refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 184 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 18 Single IP Single IP Management SIM a simple and useful method to optimize network utilities and management is designed to manage a group of switches as a single entity called an SIM group Implementing the SIM feature will have the following advantages for users Simplify management of small workgroups or wiring closets while scaling networks to handle increased bandwidth demand Reduce the number of IP addresses needed on the network Support virtual stacking structure Eliminate any specialized cables for stacking and remove the distance barriers that typically limit topology options when using other stacking technology 3 18 1 Configuration This section descri
32. Group to VLAN This section allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the selected switch Web Interface To Display Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Group Name VLAN Configuration and Add new entry 2 Specify the Group Name and VLAN ID 3 Click Save Figure 3 12 7 2 The Group Name of VLAN Mapping Table Port Members Delete Group Name VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 No Group entries m rates Port Members Delete Group Name VLAN ID 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 oa 104 98 108 b ala al al Addn ey Sas Parameter description e Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of at most 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 No special character is allowed Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group Mapping Table and must not be pre used by any other existing mapping entry on this page eo VLANID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID Mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the
33. HH MM To Day Week Month Time 00 00 HH MM Parameter description o Clock Source There are two modes for configuring where the Clock Source is from Choose one of them to make time setting 1 Use Local Settings In this mode Clock Source is from Local Time Set the time manually 2 Use NTP Server In this mode Clock Source is from the NTP Server The switch can link to the Network Time Protocol server to obtain the correct time automatically when the NTP server has been set e Local Time Shows the current time of the system e Time Zone Offset Provides the time zone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720 minutes e Daylight Savings Time Daylight Savings Time DST is utilized in some countries If set it will adjust the time lag or advance in unit of hours according to the starting date and the ending date For example let s assume you want the daylight savings time DST to advance 1 hour When the system time passes over the DST starting time the system time will be increased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over And when the time passes over the ending time the system time will be decreased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over The switch supports valid configurable daylight savings time is from 5 5 in one hour increments Note If you enable daylight savings you must set the starting en
34. Interface To configure a RADIUS Details Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Server you wish to check 2 Check the Auto refresh button Figure 4 6 3 The RADIUS Authentication Statistics Server Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped State Round Trip Time Receive Packets Responses Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped State Round Trip Time Parameter description Transmit Packets Access Requests Access Retransmissions Pending Requests Timeouts Transmit Packets Requests Retransmissions 0 0 0 Pending Requests 0 Timeouts 0 Other Info RADIUS Authentication Statistics e Reres J cea The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Name Access ES Accepts Rx Access Rejects Rx Access Challenges Malformed Rx Access Responses RFC4668 Name radiusAuthClientExtAccess Accepts radiusAuthClientExtAccess Rejects radiusAuthClientExtAccess Challenges radiusAuthClientExtMalform edAccessResponses Description The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Reject pack
35. LLDP port e Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors e CDP Aware Cisco Discovery Protocol Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabi
36. Name 00 40 c7 74 00 d1 Configuration Revision 0 Parameter description Configuration Identification e Configuration Name The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 66 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 MSTI Mapping eo MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped VLANs Mapped The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty I e not having any VLANs e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 4 3 MSTI Priorities Used when implementing Spanning Tree protocol on the switch with the bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active Controls are available for the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the
37. No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected switch unit when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members on any unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 132 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 10 6 2 Status This section shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users Currently the switch supports the following VLAN User types NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Web Interface To Display MAC based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click MAC based VLAN Status 2 Specify the Static NAS Combined 3 Display MAC based information Figure 3 10 6 2 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static i z Port Members MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Parameter description MAC Address Indicates the MAC address eo VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click th
38. PAR AR A NN BAVA QOS is a a A se JA Port COS SUICACI N cit titan dei tail iia eevee seve hese A tee ir SAAD POE POUCIIG res tic di E o eE dE in Seas adobe odbu cade CATAE E E Tea asa deal SLAF A LIA A A AN 3 144 Port SHAPING 2s ci nd a dee tetas 3 43 Port TAR REMAKING coor iitc leiste iea en o ena AR KE EEES EEEE EEEa EE ETES IIAO Port DS CP oe ii naaa ii it feta ISLAS DSCPBAS CA OOS ii ca 3 14 SD SCP Translation A EE AA 164 3 149 DS CP Classificados 166 3 14 10 QoS Control List COnfIgUrati0N oociooionnnonnnnnonnnonncnnncnno ono nono nn no nn nono oran cnn o nnn nn nn cnn cane cone on neon arca ncnns 167 3 14 11 OCL Status QOS Control List cccccccscccessecescceessecesccesssecesneeessecseneeescecseneeeacecseceeeaaecseeeeeaaeceeeeeeaes 171 JATZ Storm O OO dad edo 173 3 19 THERMAL PROTECTION aee eee eee e aea eraa Gata decd BAM E ae E a Saas 174 ISI Configuration s ss isi osea a ivaa indice Deans eld Dias IAA oe EES a ii lied 174 A al a E lee ERS 176 3 16 S FLOWAGEN Vi A A oa 177 JACA E0 AE 0 EIR PEET e a nee Nace thal 177 3 16 2 Sampler iii it ti dle id didas 179 3 17 LOOP PROTECTION a A ee 182 3 71 Configuration aid ia tia ta dd a a ia dls 182 SET EATEN 717 KR A al ds lee PED 184 ILES SINGER IP 1 55 05 cose eco clive a A a a ies 185 TELS A CONIBULA MO AA A A A A 185 ISS DIM fOTINGUON A AAA A did 186 S219 BASY PORT A A A AA 188 ILOMIRRORIN GA ias 190 3 21 TRAP EVENT SEVERITY Vi Aa 192 3 22 MTP CONFIGURATION ci 194
39. SG72660MP Revision A3 3 19 Easy Port Easy Port provides a convenient way to save and share common configurations You can use it to enable features and settings based on the location of a switch in the network and for mass configuration deployments across the network It permits you to easily implement a Voice IP phone a Wireless Access Point and an IP Camera etc You can also leverage the configuration to run a converged voice video and data network considering quality of service QoS bandwidth latency and high performance Web Interface To configure the Easy Port in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Easy Port 2 Set the parameters 3 Scroll the Role feature to select what kind of device you want to set on the Easy Port and connect to 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 19 1 The Easy Port Configuration VLAN Mode Voice VLAN Traffic Class Port Security Port Security Action Port Security Limit Spanning Tree Admin Edge Spanning Tree BPDU Guard Parameter description Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in an Easy Port check the box as Y Remove or exclude the port from the VLAN Make sure the box is unchecked as shown By default no ports are members e Role The port roles a
40. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the RADIUS Status manually 228 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 4 6 3 RADIUS Details This section explains how to display the detailed statistics of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Web
41. Topology Topology MSTI BridgelD D Port Cost Flag Change Last CIST 80 00 00 40 C7 74 00 C9 80 00 00 40 C7 74 00 C9 0 Steady Parameter description eo MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e BridgeID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e RootID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge it is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Permits changing Flag of this Bridge instance Topology Change Last The time since the last Topology Change occurred e Auto refresh To activate the auto refresh feature to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the STP Bridges status information manually 3 4 7 Port Status After you complete the STP configurations the switch can display the STP Port Status This section provides information how to display the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Port Status 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figur
42. Web Interface To Display the per Port Detail Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Detailed Port Statistics 2 Scroll the Port Index to select which port you want to show the Detailed Port Statistics Overview 3 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the Port Detailed Statistics or click Clear to clear all information Figure 3 1 4 The Port Detail Statistics Overview Pont w Auto refresh Refresh Clear Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx Unicast Rx Multicast Rx Broadcast Rx Pause Receive Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters Rx Q0 Rx Q1 Rx Q2 Rx Q3 Rx Q4 Rx Q5 Rx Q6 Rx Q7 Parameter description Auto refresh 7637 1518566 7183 29 425 e 4761 200 a 2588 on o 7637 coooooo Transmit Total Tx Packets Tx Octets Tx Unicast Tx Multicast Tx Broadcast Tx Pause Transmit Size Counters Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Transmit Queue Counters Tx Q0 Tx Q1 Tx Q2 Tx Q3 Tx Q4 Tx Q5 Tx Q6 Tx Q7 10688 3337459 4974 5714 To evoke the auto refresh automatically Upper left scroll bar to refresh
43. a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate log ons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange 262 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 ICMP ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generates the error response diagnostics or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions IEEE 802 1X IGMP IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that por
44. accurately determine the local time Otherwise you will not be able to get the correct time The switch supports configurable time zone from 12 to 13 in increments of 1 hour Default Time zone 8 Hrs Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM NTP 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Save Figure 2 2 2 The NTP configuration NTP Configuration Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 Server 5 Parameter description eo Serverito5 Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol tul is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 eo Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 11 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 3 Account In this function only the administrator can create modify or delete the username and password The administrator can modify other guest identities passwords without confirming the password but it is necessary to modify the administrator equivalent ident
45. address Using IPv6 Address range Proxy Enabled Enables MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side eo Port The Port index you select to enable or disable the MLD Snooping function eo Fast Leave Enables the fast leave function on the port e Router Port Specifies which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port e Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset eu to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 88 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 6 2 VLAN Configuration When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts It will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web I
46. are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled o State Specify the port state of this port The allowed values are Enabled To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module Disabled To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module The default value is Enabled e Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone Clear Click to clear the counters 3 2 2 Rate Limiters This section describes how to configure the switch s ACL Rate Limiter parameters The Rate Limiter Levels range from 1 to 16 and allow the user to set rate limiter values and units with pps or
47. are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS NFS NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a NTP OAM computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this Optional TLVs OUI PCP PD
48. be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disables the DHCP snooping mode operation Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as a trusted source of the DHCP messages Untrusted Configures the port as an untrusted source of the DHCP messages eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 2 Statistics This section describes how to display the DHCP Snooping Statistics information of the switch The statistics show only packet counters when DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled It doesn t count the DHCP packets for DHCP client Web Interface To configure the DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port you want to monitor 2 Check the Auto refresh button Figure 4 3 2 The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Bases Joe Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Tx Discover Rx Offer Tx Offer Rx Request Tx Request Rx Decline Tx Decline Rx ACK Tx ACK Rx NAK Tx NAK Rx Release Tx Release Rx Inform Tx Inform Rx Lease Query Tx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active Tx Lease Active ooooooooooo eo ooooococococcoc Coco oe Parameter description e Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with valu
49. before the hyphen is the version of the electronic hardware the one after the hyphen is the version of mechanical e Serial number The serial number is assigned by VERSITRON Inc e Host IP address The IP address of the switch e Subnet Mask Displays the IP subnet mask assigned to the device eo Gateway IP Address Displays the default gateway IP address assigned to the device e Host MAC address It is the Ethernet MAC address of the management agent in this switch e Console Baudrate Displays the baud rate of the RS232 COM port e RAM size The size of the RAM in this switch e Flash size The size of the flash memory in this switch e Bridge FDB size Displays the bridge forwarding database size of the device e Transmit Queue Displays the information about the transmit priority queue of switch e Maximum Frame size Displays the information about the maximum frame size supported by the switch 6 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 2 1 2 Configuration You can identify the system by configuring the contact information name and location of the switch Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click System System Information Configuration 2 Enter the System Contact System Name and System Location information on this page 3 Click Save Figure 2 1 2 System Information Configuration System Information Configuration System Contact _ System Name SG72660M Syste
50. box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group 136 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of a new entry eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh icon to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information manually 3 10 8 IEEE 802 1QinQ double tag configuration Service providers can use Q in Q to transparently pass Layer 2 VLAN traffic from a customer site through the service provider changing the customer VLAN tags network to another customer site without removing or The double Q in Q tags can indicate different information the inner tag indicates the user the outer tag indicates carrier provider The Q in Q packet with two tags can traverse the carrier s network and the inner tag is transmitted transparently Scenario Switch will be used for Leased Line Service They are already using Tag VLAN 802 1q and they would like to add another Tag without changing existing VLAN Ty
51. by source host S to group G The network will deliver IP multicast packets from source host S to group G to all hosts in the network that have subscribed to the channel S G SSM does not require group address allocation within the network only within each source host Different applications running on the same source host must use different SSM groups Different applications running on different source hosts can arbitrarily reuse SSM group addresses without causing any excess traffic on the network Addresses in the range 232 0 0 0 8 232 0 0 0 to 232 255 255 255 are reserved for SSM by IANA In the switch you can also configure SSM for arbitrary IP multicast addresses Web Interface To display the IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping IPv4 SSM Information 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click the Auto Refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information IGMPv3 Information Ae Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224 000 with 120 entries per page VLANID Group PortNo Mode Source Address Type No more entries Parameter description Navigating the IGMPv3 Information Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMPv3 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 s
52. complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant NOTE Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the S
53. entry j Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The Vlan Id for the settings e MAC Address The Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address The Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Specify the Port VLAN ID MAC address and IP address for the new entry Click Save eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 3 Dynamic Table This section describes how to configure the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Web Interface To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address and entries per page 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 2 3 The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table a CN Port VLANID MAC Address IP Address o No more entres Parameter description Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed eo VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted e MAC Address User MAC address of the entry e IP
54. for MAC based authentication eo LastID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not 218 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the NAS Switch Status manually 4 5 3 Port Status This section describes how to display detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication Web Interface To configure a NAS Port Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port you wish to check 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 5 3 The NAS Statistics Admin State Force Authorized Receive EAPOL Counters Transmit EAPOL Counters el 0 Total Parameter descri
55. interface 1 Click System System Information CPU Load 2 Display the CPU Load on the screen 3 Click Auto refresh Figure 2 1 3 CPU Load 100ms 0 Isec 3 10sec 3 all numbers running average Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon so the switch will refresh the log automatically Gi Note The under from and to was displayed what you set on the From and To field information 8 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 2 Time This page configures the switch Time This includes Time Configuration and NTP Configuration 2 2 1 Manual The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP Manual setting is straightforward You simply input Year Month Day Hour Minute and Second within the valid value range indicated in each item Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click Time Manual 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Save Figure 2 2 1 The time configuration Time Configuration Use Local Settings Clock Source Use NTP Server Local Time 2011 01 01 00 10 20 YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Time Zone Offset 0 min Daylight Savings Enable Time Set Offset so min Range 1 1440 Default 60 Daylight Savings By dates Type Recurring From YYYY MM DD HH MM To YYYY MM DD HH MM From Day Week Month Time 00 00
56. is ACTIVE or IDLE e Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries e Queries Received The number of Received Queries e Vi Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received 82 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Auto refresh Select the auto refresh icon to refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear Click to Refresh the Status or Clear the Status manually 3 5 5 Group Information After you complete the settings for the IGMP Snooping function the switch can display the IGMP Snooping Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group It will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping Group Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Group Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then select the Auto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry
57. mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 7 2 The Port Security Switch Status Current Limit Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9A 104 98 108 Parameter description User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port 236 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module ha
58. no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmissions of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled eo Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but
59. not possible local use the local user database on the switch for authentication radius use a remote RADIUS server for authentication tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than none or local eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 244 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 Maintenance This chapter describes all of the switch Maintenance configuration tasks to enhance the performance of the local network including Restart Device Firmware Upgrade Save Restore Import Export and Diagnostics 5 1 Restart Device This section describes how to restart the switch for any maintenance needs Any configuration files or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards Web Interface To configure a Restart Device Configuration in the web interface 1 Check RestartDevice 2 Click Yes Figure 5 1 1 The Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Parameter description e Restart Device You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally eo Buttons Yes Click
60. of DEI can be any values of 0 1 or Any e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frames if configured parameters are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class If a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Classified Drop Precedence Level If a frame matches the QCE then DP level will be set to the value displayed under DPL column DSCP Classified DSCP value If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE QoS Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Q Moves the QCE up the list O Moves the QCE down the list 9 Deletes the QCE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings Parameter description e Port Members Use the checkbox button if you wish to make any port a member of the QCL entry By 168 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 default all ports will be checked Key Parameters Key configuration parameters are described below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid values of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any User can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid v
61. operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot Port Error Recovery Timeout The time to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 2 4 2 MSTI Mapping Used when implementing Spanning Tree protocol on the switch with the bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped Due to the reason that you need to set the list of VLANs mapped to the MST the VLANs must be separated with a comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it This section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping 2 Specify the configuration identification parameters in the field Specify the VLANs Mapped in the blank field 3 Click the Save button to save the settings 4 If you wish to cancel the settings click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 2 The MSTI Configuration onfiguration Identification Configuration
62. specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Force join to Voice VLAN e Port Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation e Port Discovery Protocol Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled You should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart the auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 142 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 11 2 OUI This section describes how to Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process Web Interface To configure Voice VLAN OUI Table in the web interface 1 Select Add new entry Delete in the Voice VLAN OUI table 2 Specify Telephony OUI and Description 3 Click Save Figure 3 11 2 The Voice VLA
63. starting from the port with the highest port number e Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delivered to a remote device Note If you want to set the Port support IEEE802 3at then you can set the Maximum allowed value as 30W e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 6 1 2 Status This page allows the user to inspect the current status for all PoE ports This section shows all port Power Over Ethernet status Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Status in the web interface 1 Click Status 2 Display Power Over Ethernet Status Information 3 Click Refresh Power Over Ethernet Status o O Local PD Power Power Power Current Port class Requested Allocated Used Used Priority Port Status A a Po OFF P 0 of om oi 0 mA Low Feed tumed Pot tumed OFF PoE sales POE turned OFF PoE Osaties PoE turned OFF PoE 0 9 omy om 0 mA lew 3 0 oma omi om 0 mA Low 1 4 0 o pun om oi 0 ma ee aa 5 0 ony on on 0 ma Low ETS OFF Pek 6 0 omg om ema 0 ma Low Pos OFF lt PE 7 0 ond om om 0 ma Low As OFF PoE 8 0 om omy ona 0 mA low POE tumed OFF PoE ea alect Figure 6 1 2 Power Over Ethernet Status Parameter description e Local Port This is the logical port number for this row e PD Class To display the PD Power class
64. switch forms a Bridge Identifier This section describes how the user can inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities 2 Scroll the Priority Maximum is 240 Default is 128 3 Click the Save button to save the settings 4 If you wish to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 3 The MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration praje 8 gt EJEA EJEA E par pe EJEA Parameter description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 68 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 4 4 CIST Ports Used when implementing Spanning Tree protocol on the switch with the bridge instance Allows you to configure the CIST Ports This section describes how the user can inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well W
65. that identifies with a specified current The classification current describes the amount of power the PD will require during normal operation e Power Requested The Power Requested shows the requested amount of power the PD wants to be reserved Note PD is a power dependent PoE device e Power Allocated The Power Allocated shows the amount of power the switch has allocated for the PD Power Used The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using e Current Used The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using e Priority The Priority shows the port s priority configured by the user eo Port Status The Port Status shows the port s status e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the PoE Port information manually 258 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 ACE ACL AES APS A Glossary of Web based Management ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or gr
66. the switch 250 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 5 4 Export Import This section describes how to export and import the switch configuration Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format 5 4 1 Export Config This section describes to export the switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interface To configure an Export Config Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Save configuration 2 Click Save to save the file in your device Figure 5 4 1 The Restore the Backup Configuration Save configuration File Download Do you want to open or save this file lt Q Name config xml Type XML Document 49 4KB From 192 168 20 22 While files from the Internet car useful some files can potentially harm your computer If you dg E save this file What s the jaf Save in Desktop M O8 PE my Documents 9 My Computer My Recent amy Network Places Documents 1000913 520111001 Dai Desktop when download completes Open Jf Open Foi ddisc_change_v2_5 My Documents My Computer File name config xml Save as type XML Document Cancel P My Network Parameter description Save Click the Save button to store the Configuration to the PC or Server 5 4 2 Import Config This sect
67. the Port Statistics information To scroll which port to display the Port statistics with Port 0 Port 1 Receive Total and Transmit Total Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frames receive
68. the STP RSTP bridge Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information to Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering 64 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Controls whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Edge Port BPDU Guard Controls whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Port Error Recovery Controls whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP
69. the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 2 6 5 Groups The function is used to configure SNMPv3 group The Entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name To create a new group account please check lt Add new group gt button and enter the group information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number v1 2 v2 2 v3 10 Web Interface To display the configuration for the SNMP Groups in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Groups 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save Figure 2 6 5 The SNMP Groups Configuration Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name O vi public O v private O vec public O Ye private O usm default_user Add new group Save Security Model Security Name Group Name vi 125323 E Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are vi Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed conten
70. the interface of the SG72660M has been configured you can browse it For instance type_http 192 168 1 1 in the address row in a browser It will show the following screen and ask you to input the username and password in order to login and access authentication The default username is admin and password is empty For the first time to use please enter the default username and password and then click the lt Login gt button The login process now is completed In this login menu you have to input the complete username and password respectively The SG72660M will not give you a shortcut to username automatically This may seem inconvenient but it is safer The SG72660M supports a simple user management function allowing only one administrator at a time to configure the system If there are two or more users using the administrator s identity it will allow only the one who logins first to configure the system The rest of the users even with administrator s identity can only monitor the system Those who have no administrator s identity can only monitor the system There are only a maximum of three users able to simultaneously login in to the SG72660M switch 2 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Gi NOTE When you login to the SG72660M switch to utilize web management you must first type the Username of the administrator The Password field is left blank After typing the Username please press enter The web
71. the packet response from the target PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet 266 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to the main power supply Policer POP3 A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two mo
72. time the transmit path can hold off sending data after reassertion of LPI 0 Rx Tw The link partner s time the receiver would like the transmitter to hold off to allow time for the receiver to wake from sleep e Fallback Receive Tw The link partner s fallback receive Tw A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation For systems that do not implement this option the default value is the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys_tx e Echo Tx Tw The link partner s Echo Tx Tw value The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link partner s reflection echo of the remote link partner s respective values When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received registered and processed its most recent values For example if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB then the local link partner infers that the remote link partner s request was based on stale information o Echo Rx Tw The link partner s Echo Rx Tw value Resolved Tx Tw The resolved Tx Tw for this link Note NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup ti
73. to free any resources is to age the entry Oo Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes e modes using the Port Security function to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS Assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports RADIUS
74. to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bind
75. translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following cri
76. two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down STP STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Designated y Root gt X i Designated PAN y Designated Port X Bridge Root Port Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid netw
77. wi 1 Port pee y Disabled A 2 l0 Permit Disabled Port Pot2 M Disabled Es 3 0 Permit Disabled Port 1 Pot2 MI a 4 0 Permit Disabled Port 1 5 0 Permit Disabled Port 1 Parameter description Port Mirror Logging lt gt v lt gt Disabled Y Disab Disabled Disab Disabled Y Disab Disabled Disab Disabled Disab The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Policy ID 46 v ed v ed ed Y ed ed Y Shutdown State Counter lt gt v lt gt vv Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Enabled v 0 Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Enabled 0 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 0 through 255 The default value is 0 e Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit o Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled o Port Redirect Select which port frames are redirected The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port
78. will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network 18 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 4 2 IPV6 This section describes how to configure the switch managed IPv6 information The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration And the Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Web Interface To configure Management IPv6 of the switch in the web interface 1 Click System IPv6 Configuration 2 Specify the IPv6 settings and enable Auto Configuration service if required 3 Click Save Figure2 4 2 The IPv6 configuration IPv6 Configuration Configured Current Auto Configuration O a 192 168 1 1 oie A Link Local Address fe80 240 c7fffe74 d1 Prefix 196 96 Gateway Parameter description e Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If this fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds The total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four h
79. 0o0oo0o0o0ooooo ocoooooooooooo 2c0o00o0o0o0oooooo c0oo0o0oo0o0oooooo 200000000000 oc0oo0o0o0o0ooo0oo oooooooooooo Parameter description Global Counters e Neighbor entries were last changed at Shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added lt also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected e Total Neighbors Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Total Neighbors Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Total Neighbors Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full e Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within t
80. 1320300003 e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VolP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 Priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming V
81. 216 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 4 5 2 Switch Status This section describes how to display the NAS status information for each port of the switch The status includes Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID QoS Class and Port VLAN ID Web Interface To configure an NAS Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 5 2 The Network Access Server Switch Status Admin State Port State Last Source LastID QoSClass Port VLAN ID Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Gl Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled 9B Force Authorized Globally Disabled 40B Force Authorized Globally Disabled Parameter description Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Oo Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states o Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client
82. 24 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC address is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC address is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new address will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC address is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken State 234 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 This column sh
83. 2660MP Revision A3 The criteria index for the thermal protection trigger temperature The index is from 0 to 3 e Temperature To set the temperature criterion to trigger the thermal protection D Note The temperature means the MAC and PHY chipset s TA temperature not the PSU device temperature or environment temperature Please don t adjust environment temperature limitation value e Port priorities The priority the port belongs to It allows user to determine what priority criterion to trigger so the port is turned off via thermal protection e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 15 2 Status This section shows the user how to inspect the thermal status information related to thermal protection once user configures the Thermal protection function Web Interface To display the Thermal Protection Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Thermal Protection Status Figure 3 15 2 The Thermal Protection status Parameter description eo Port Indicates the list of physical ports e Temperature Shows the current chipset temperature in degrees Celsius Gi Note The temperature means the MAC and PHY chipset s TA temperature not the PSU device temperature or environment temperature e Port Status Displays the port status includes link up or link down e Auto refresh Click the
84. 52550 IP Gateway 0 0 00 VLANID DNS Server 0000 0000 When you specify a new management VLAN your HTTP connection to the old management VLAN is lost For this reason you should have a connection between your management station and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through a multi VLAN route VLAN Membership The VLAN membership configuration for the selected switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 4094 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN Web Interface To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Membership Configuration 2 Specify Management VLAN ID from 1 4094 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 1 2 The VLAN Membership Configuration Parameter description 122 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box and the entry will be deleted on the selected switch Warning The default VLAN 1 can be deleted But if the default VLAN 1 is deleted the connection to the switch would be lost and some errors would occur e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of every single VLAN Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 to 4094 e VLAN Name Indicates the name of the VLAN VLAN Names can contain alphabets numbers and a mix of alphabets and numbers but exclude special charact
85. 54 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specifies the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled CPU Forwards packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU CPU Once Forwards first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Auto refresh Select the auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the ACL status information manually 3 3 Aggregation The Aggregation feature is used to configure the settings for Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port This logical port aggregates the band
86. 60M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 10 5 Private VLANs In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN 3 10 5 1 Private VLANs Membership The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs Web Interface To configure Private VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new Private VLAN configuration 2 Specify the Private VLAN ID and Port Members 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 5 1 The Private VLAN Membership Configuration Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete PVLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O 1100 OOO MOMO MOMO Ma Ma E Parameter description e Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN
87. 60M switch e g Time Account IP Syslog and SNMP 2 1 System Information After you login the switch shows you the system information This is the default page and it tells you the basic information of the system including Model Name System Description Contact Device Name System Up Time BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Serial Number Host IP Address Host Mac Address Device Port RAM Size and Flash Size With this information you will know the software version used MAC address serial number how many ports are good and so on 2 1 1 Information The switch system information is provided here Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM System and Information 2 Specify the contact information for the system administrator as well as the name and location of the switch Also indicate the local time zone by configuring the appropriate offset 3 Click Refresh Figure 2 1 1 System Information Model Name System Description Location Contact Device Name System Date System Uptime BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Series Number Host IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Host MAC Address Console Baudrate RAM Size Flash Size Bridge FDB Size Transmit Queue Maximum Frame Size GEL2 ESW26K 20 Port 10 100 1000Base T
88. 78 3 33 Port Group Filtering oasis ti dt dde dial aio eae Westen bei 80 DAD SEATS ct Ad PIAR E Ii AA Aid 82 3 5 3 Group Informati n s iii a dl da da eter A indeed PU di 84 3 5 6 IPv4 SSM information ss asip ienei RAN 85 3 6 MLD MULTICAST LISTENER DISCOVERY SNOOPING s cccssssecessssceceeseececeeseecessueeecsesaeeeseesaesessneeecseaaeees 87 3 6 1 Basic Configuration ssi sieniin reie a e EE siete diran Did ES EEAS T U E ses 87 3 6 2 VEAN Conficurati olsi ie Eoen EE E EE ads 89 3 63 Fort Group Filtering rosnie Ai aid 9 3 0 4 M LIV Snoopie Status a ii il ls as 92 ISO Group Informa nom A aah A A ins ii 94 3 6 6 IPv6 SSM Information Source Specific Multicast ooooncnnncnnnnnncnnonnnnnnnnn cono cnno corno nono nora nona conan crnnon 96 3 7 MVR MULTICAST VLAN REGISTRATION cccssccessssceceesececssseececseececsesaececseseeeesseeecsesaesecseseesesseeecneaaeees 97 IZA CONUS UI ATOMS A A ii 97 3 7 2 GTOUDS NOTING OM os E EEE E SE o R e Nei A E aE EOE EA ep NEES 99 ESASINA TANA OA AEAEE N A ANE E E NN 100 3 8 LLDP LINK LAYER DISCOVERY PROTOCOL cccssssecesssseeceensececseceeceesaececseneececseseecesaeeecsesaeeeseneeeeneaaes 101 36T ELDP Configuration ii a it 101 3 8 2 BEDE NCIGNDOLS A E avs ou nite even vans su vee Waa E E E EN 104 INIA A AAA O 106 3 8 4 LEDP MED Neighbors A thas svenvaseiaesssvabeecasees oa hdusbeocascesessbsesbuecaseasagdandvuecssereegtseeati 112 3 8 5 EEE Energy Efficient Ethernet niniin onna a
89. A drop down list to select the type of IP Collector is displayed By default IPv4 is the type of Collector IP type You can select IPv4 or IPv6 e IP Address The address of a reachable IP is to be entered into the text box This IP is used to monitor the sFlow samples sent by sFlow Agent our switch By default The IP is set to 0 0 0 0 and a new entry has to be added to it Port Aport to listen to the sFlow Agent has to be configured for the Collector The value of the port number has to be typed into the text box The value accepted is within the range of 1 65535 But an appropriate port number not used by other protocols need to be configured By default the port s number is 6343 e Time out It is the duration of time during which the collector receives samples Once it is expired the sampler stops sending the samples It is through the management the value is set before it expires The value accepted is within the range of 0 2147483647 By default it is set to 0 e Datagram Size It is the maximum UDP datagram size to send out the sFlow samples to the receiver The value accepted is within the range of 200 1500 bytes The default is 1400 bytes o Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 178 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 16 2 Sampler This section displays the sFlow sampler that has been set or which can be edited for your require
90. A nia a walsh E hone nar angte E T a tetliah ina aie alert E 262 o a o e ll tag la oa Aa cline 262 A naa latlac 263 Diceitegctestatec ea Ae a lea calla testis ihe e a tna Ae ala ruse 264 A A A 264 A EN Cee Teen eet 265 A A A A 266 A A Se nda oN ahi ahd octal Saha A hh Se alin oe Naa 266 A Sen Salas A aaa 267 A che ah os as ante ait ch A ahaha cdi E A 268 O O NA 268 A A A A 269 a ta a la 270 Revision History Release Date Revision v0 91 08 12 2011 Al V1 09 12 30 2011 A2 V1 34 Jun 13 2014 A3 viii SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 INTRODUCTION Overview This User Manual provides detailed information and guidance on how to install and connect the SG72660M switch in your network system and how to configure and monitor the SG72660M through the web interface Detailed explanations in of hardware and software functions are shown as well as examples of the operation for using the web based interface The SG72660M switch from VERSITRON Inc is an affordable feature rich managed switch that provides a reliable infrastructure for your business network The switch delivers intelligent features you need to improve the availability of your critical business applications protect your sensitive information and optimize your network bandwidth to deliver information and applications more effectively It provides the ideal combination of affordability and capabilities for entry level or advanced networking appli
91. A3 2 4 IP IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bit Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bit Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet 2 4 1 IPV4 The IPv4 address for the switch could be obtained via DHCP Server for VLAN 1 To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment Configur
92. Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the current temperature information manually 176 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 16 s Flow Agent The sFlow Collector configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 1 Collector is supported This page allows for configuring sFlow collector IP type sFlow collector IP Address and Port number for each sFlow Collector 3 16 1 Collector The Current field displays the currently configured sFlow Collector The Configured field displays the new Collector Configuration Web Interface To configure the sFlow Agent in the web interface 1 Click Configuration sFlow Agent Collector 2 Set the parameters 3 Scroll to IP Type to select IPv4 or IPv6 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 1 The sFlow Collector Configuration sFlow Receiver Configuration Configured Current Receiver Id 1 1 IP Type IP 4 IP IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port 6343 6343 Time Out 0 0 Datagram Size 1400 1400 Parameter description e Receiver Id The Receiver ID input fields allow the user to select the receiver ID Indicates the ID of this particular sFlow Receiver Currently one ID is supported as one collector is supported eo IP Type
93. Click Configuration QoS Port DSCP 2 Select to enable or disable the Ingress Translate feature and scroll to select the Classify Parameter configurations 3 Scroll to select Egress Rewrite parameters 4 Click Save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 6 The QoS Port DSCP Configuration QoS Port DSCP Configuration Port Ingress Egress Translate Classify Rewrite O lt gt Mp lt gt v 1 O Disable_ Y Disable 2 O Disable Disable i 3 O Disable Y Disable x 4 O Disable Disable v 5 O Disable Disable v 6 O Disable Disable y 7 O Disable Disable v 8 O Disable Disable v 9A O Disable Disable 10A a Disable Disable y 9B O Disable Disable v 10B O Disable Disable v D no oO gt Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure DSCP ingress and egress settings e Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 1 Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox 2 Classify Classification for a port can have 4 different values e Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification e DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP i
94. Currently the only supported application is GVRP Attribute Type Currently the only supported Attribute Type is VLAN GARP Applicant This configuration is used to configure the Applicant state machine behavior for GARP on a particular port locally e normal participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will operate normally in GARP protocol exchanges e non participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will not participate in the protocol operation The default configuration is normal participant Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 12 2 Statistics The section describes to access port statistics of GARP for all switch ports The port statistics relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GARP Port statistics in the web interface 1 Click GARP Statistics 2 Scroll Select which port you want to display the GARP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GARP statistics information Figure 3 12 2 The GARP Port Statistics Port PeerMAC Failed Count A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 0A 9B lA aja ist Se AS TUNA A E E lle ES E ll pala Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of all ports for which per port GARP statistics are shown Peer MAC Peer MAC is the MAC address of the neighbor Switch from with the GAR
95. Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds e EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports e Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802 1X based mode this is not so critical since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way
96. E will match only IPV6 frames eo Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Conflict Displays Conflict status of QCL entries As H W resources are shared by multiple applications it may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available In that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H W resources required to add QCL entry by clicking Resolve Conflict button 0 Buttons Combined Y _ Select the QCL status from this drop down list Auto refresh Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Resolve Conflict Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry in case conflict status for any QCL entry is yes Refresh Click to refresh the QCL information manually Any changes made locally will be undone 172 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 14 12 Storm Co
97. EMENT coronar 239 A AA sodeeg e nket EE S E E EE E EE TSERE S EEEE ERORE EErEE eE ERESSE 239 AO LAS ES a EEE la oc 241 ARONSON NO 242 PARES Oca fll Bl AEE ora nl oo oe 243 Aad WAUTH METHOD add Soa nee Ee io 244 CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE cissessscsscsssesssssscccssssassessssessasevcasovsdeseasesbessssbscecossssaeeseseessssaseasszeees 245 S I RESTART DEVICE s2003sSevrn aaa 245 A FIRMWARE sicce Cisse NO 246 3 2 1 Firmware Upgrade comida a db 246 5222 ETEMWOTES ECC llosa 247 ISS AVES RESTORE 0 Ad 249 vi SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 II Factory Defaults vse ssses ds egies AAA ADA A dese dE Da 249 53 2 S ve Stari ARA RN 249 33 3 Save USET AAA RN 250 5 3 4 R store USE pimus RN 250 J EXPORT IMPOR Tcen e a o eves Ww ei A A es 251 TAL Export Config sos iii a al ted 251 35 4 2 Import Config sa ni dl id dada 252 525 DIAGNOSTICS A A AA 253 NAAA IA A A A ii ca 253 S I ZPN GO a a N eR ae hanes OWS RRA Oe hee Ne ene ate waned 254 AN MEP A as 255 CHAPTER 6 POE Power Over Ethernet csscccssssscsssssscsssccccsssccessccccsssccessscccesscccssssccessscesensccessseecs 256 O21 POE A e e O a A es 256 OLI COMP QUTATON sirena A A A A ia ZOO OD 2 SIGHS AAA O AA A a A Zo O A GLOSSARY OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT wocssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssesessssees 259 A A a oh RA alta 259 Capek EE a Mal ala lo at pleat a Ai als O 260 A R alsin 260 O E tag teal aataina Aa Ma Naa testers E AA Sia 262
98. I characters from 33 to 126 e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask 2 6 4 Users This function is used to configure the SNMPv3 user The Entry index key is User Name To create a new User Name account please check lt Add new user gt button and enter the user information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 10 Web Interface To display the configuration for SNMP Users in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Users 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save Figure 2 6 4 The SNMP Users Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password O default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None ads new user J save Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Level Protocol Password Protocol Password Catete aun pre mos y Noes l Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry belongs to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security mode
99. ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed o State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh icon to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the Port Security Port Status information manually 238 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 4 8 Access Management This section shows you how to configure the access management table of the switch including HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH
100. If you wish to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 1 The IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled O Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled IGMP SSM Range 232 0 0 0 Proxy Enabled m Port Router Port FastLeave Throttling oO lt gt ME nlimited imited imited imited Y imited imited 1 2 3 4 5 6 iii 8 imited imited Y dopo0000000000 OOOOOOOOOD0O000 76 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enables the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding enabled Enables unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers to run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Format IP address sub mask Proxy Enabled Enables IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Port It shows the physical Port index of the switch Router Port Specifies which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Fast Leave Enables the Fast Leave on the port Th
101. It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Any security model accepted v1 v2c usm vi Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User Based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security level that this entry should belong to Possible security levels are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 32 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 6 8 Trap This function is used to configure the SNMP trap To create a new trap account please check lt No number gt button and enter the trap information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number 6 Web Interface To configure SNM
102. LACP functions have been set the switch provides a Port Status overview for all LACP settings Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then click the Auto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Port Status Figure 3 3 2 3 The LACP Status LII Refresh Partner Partner LACP Key AggrID System ID Port No Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 104 9B 108 Parameter description Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if another port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled eo Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e AggrID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs e Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address e Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port e Auto refresh Click to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the LACP port status information manually 3 3 2 4 Port Statistics This section describes how once the LACP functions have been set the switch pr
103. M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 5 2 2 Firmware Selection The switch supports Dual image for firmware redundancy purposes You can select the firmware image for your device start firmware or operating firmware This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image Web Interface To configure a Firmware Selection in the web interface 1 Check Activate Alternate Image 2 Click OK to complete firmware selection Figure 5 2 2 The Firmware Selection Active Image managed n GS1510 08 standalone dev build by edward Qlocalhost localdomain 2011 10 20T15 46 27 08 00 2011 10 20T 15 46 27 08 00 Alternate Image managed bk GEL2 ESW106 standalone dev build by tanks localhost localdomain 2011 10 18T10 50 50 08 00 2011 10 18T10 50 50 08 00 Activate Alternate Image Message from w 2bpage D Are you sure you want to activate the alternate software image Parameter description e Image The flash index name of the firmware i image ne name of the primary preferred image is e Version The version of the firmware image e Date The date when the firmware was produced eo Buttons Activate Alternate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this page Gi NOTE 1 Incase t
104. N Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier Compatibility RV Ql sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec 1 O E Parameter description VLAN ID It displays the VLAN ID of the entry Snooping Enabled Enables the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Up to 32 VLANs can be selected IGMP Querier A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Querier Enables the IGMP Querier in the VLAN Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 The default compatibility value is IGMP Auto Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 QI 78 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100
105. N OUI Table Voice VLAN OUI Table Delete Telephony OUI Description O 00 01 83 Siemens AG phones C 00 03 6b Cisco phones 00 0f e2 H3C phones O 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones O 00 d0 1e Pingtel phones 00 e0 75 Polycom phones O 00 e0 bb 3Com phones Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Telephony OUI A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normally it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to The allowed string length is 0 to 32 e Add New entry Click to add a new entry in Voice VLAN OUI table An empty row is added to the table the Telephony OUI Description e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Gi NOTE All non telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds For example When Pkts keep to enter the port to add a new OUI entry It can help this OUI match current Pkts then it must be found the packet will be forwarded 3 12 GARP The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP provides a generic framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN e g end stations and switches can register and de register attribute
106. P Level PCP and DEI parameters 3 Click Save to save the settings 4 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 1 The QoS Configuration QoS Ingress Port Classification Port QoSclass DPlevel PCP DEI TagClass DSCP Based 1 ov ov ow jov Disabled O 2 ow om fowl lov Disabled O 3 ov Ov av lov Disabled O 4 oy Ov Ov lov Disabled O 5 ov Ov Ov jo Disabled O 6 low oo aio Disabled O 7 lov ov Ov lov Disabled O 8 ov ov ov lov Disabled O 9A ov ov Ov jov Disabled O 10A ov ov low os Disabled O a lov Ov av lov Disabled O 108 0 ov Ov lov Disabled O Parameter description o Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e QoS class 150 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority DP level Controls the default DP level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order
107. P Trap setting 1 Click SNMP Trap 2 Display the SNMP Trap Hosts Configuration table 3 Select aa entry to display and modify the detail parameters or click delete button to delete the trap host entry Figure 2 6 8 The SNMP Trap Host Configuration Server UDP Community Security Severity Security Authentication Privacy Delete No Version p Pot Name Level Level Protocol Protocol Trap Version Server IP UDP Port Community Security Name Severity Level Security Level Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Parameters description e Delete Check lt Delete gt entry then check lt Save gt button the entry will be deleted e Trap Version You may choose v1 v2c or v3 trap eo Server IP To assign the SNMP Host IP address e UDP Port To assign Port number Default 162 e Community Security Name The length of Community Security Name string is restricted to 1 32 Security Level Indicates what kind of message will be sent to Security Level Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Security Level There are three kinds of choices NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy Authentication Protocol You can choose MD5 or SHA for authentication Authentication P
108. P di ai dd ATA AAA E acacia 33 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURATION ooccocconconocnnonncnnconcnnonncnnonoconocononncnnoncnnono conoce nocncncconcn non cc nonerccncn ro nonnones 35 O NOTO 35 JAI Configuration id a dia 35 31 2 POr DO SCHIPU ON sii coos A 37 3 1 3 Traffic OV EPVICW aiseee aerie Sea sda acia 38 J4 Detailed Statisties aena n aa aha bila Besta hede oui es ts A aes EE E A aed ETERS 39 SDD QOS SAS OS A A seabed ca baak A aa Taga ndadia saat cd 4 FLO SEP Informati n 0 dba 42 IAE A eRe ee 44 IZACL A and 46 IEPS ii A E Ai thea eouds isnddeas EE 46 DEL 2D RACE Limiters sas sissies oss cd wack Sita usa a bu aa A cn 48 3 2 3 Access Control List iii dida 49 SZ A CE SAUS cd A A S E E SE EAA E EEE aK aR 54 B Si AGGREGATION A desa 343 1 Static Trunki isai O E aai Ee a ria eia ia SER AS Da O ii A E T 3 3 2 1 Configuration 3 3 2 2 System Status 3 323 POLE STAUIS NT 3 3 2 4 Port Statistics SA SPANNING TREE sao sivas scons e EEE a EEE E E E E EEEa E EE ENEE EE T E ai SEE D E ITIR SN ci aida 24 2 MSTI Mp ping E ta aE A E NS iv SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 4 3 MSTI PTOS ADA A AAA 68 344 CIST Ll A E 69 SE Y IE LAA RAN 71 34 0 Bridge SAUS id Ai 73 34 7 Pott SAU Se e ie E N E na iaa tds 74 IAS POLE Statistiese an A DA AA seta ne EE TENE a ia 75 3 5 IGMP SNOGPING 38 14H sore kati Sade ee O a eames 76 3231 Basic Configuration sta dE ida br eT aes WH Westen eet 76 3 5 2 VEAN Configuration aria oe dee Vichada ATS ie beis
109. P frame is received e Failed Count Explains Failed Count here e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh icon to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the GARP Port Statistics information manually 146 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 13 GVRP GVRP is an application based on Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP mainly used to automatically and dynamically maintain the group membership information of the VLANs The GVRP offers the function providing the VLAN registration service through a GARP application It makes use of GARP Information Declaration GID to maintain the ports associated with their attribute database and GARP Information Propagation GIP to communicate among switches and end stations With GID information and GIP the GVRP state machine maintains the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and propagates this information to other GVRP aware devices to setup and update their knowledge database the set of VLANs associated with currently active members and through which ports these members can be reached 3 13 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GVRP Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click GVRP Configuration
110. PHY PING PoE An LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the Organizationally Unique Identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implements the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 Ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected Ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is
111. RO SOARES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YA 0A 9B 0B Disabled Parameter description LLDP Parameters e Tx Interval The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbors in order to update the network discovery information The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 up to 32768 seconds e Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 to 10 times e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 to 8192 seconds e Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is re booted an LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 to 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to those currently selected as reflected by the page header o Port The switch port number of the logical
112. Start Figure 5 5 3 The VeriPHY Port Cable Status PairA LengthA PairB LengthB PairC LengthC PairD LengthD Lp Ea Pe E pe ass i eae SEA CIS Vale A OPA Pe Pel USP ES ET A 1081 SE Van KAS Va MEEI BER eta EL RRE N EE EE a EE Ve ab 109 AE A PSE JAP PE S 51 E 15 0 A PIR BE MEA GEA 197 E 0 SEA CEN 1 ES MIE aa E 1 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 9 0 Parameter description eo Port The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair 6 1 PoE PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to the main power supply 6 1 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings and show all PoE Supply W Web Interface To configure Power Over Ethernet in the web interface 1 Click Configuration 2 Specify the Reserved Power determined and Power Management mode Specify the PoE or PoE and Priority 3 Click Save Primary Power Supply W Port PoE Mode Priority lEnabled Low Enabled w E E n Enabled_v n n J KIK ow i
113. The number of received and transmitted bytes per port o Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port 0 Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon The device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear The section describes the Port statistics information and provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports Web Interface To Display the Port Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Traffic Overview 2 If you want to auto refresh then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port statistics Click Clear to clear all information Figure 3 1 3 The Port Statistics Overview You can click Refresh to refresh the Port Statistics information manually Click Clear to clear all Port Statistics 38 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 1 4 Detailed Statistics This section describes how to provide detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit
114. VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 Max Reauth Count The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Admin State 212 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Succe
115. W verstrRON Your Copper to Fiber Connection SG72660M amp SG72660MP 26 Port 10 100 1000Base Managed PoE PoE Switch Installation Guide v1 34 June 2014 VERSITRON Inc 83 Albe Drive Suite C Newark DE 19702 www versitron com Copyright VERSITRON Inc All rights reserved All brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies PROPRIETARY DATA All data in this manual is proprietary and may not be disclosed used or duplicated for procurement or manufacturing purposes without prior written permission by VERSITRON VERSITRON LIFETIME WARRANTY All VERSITRON products are covered by a Lifetime Warranty against defects in materials and workmanship This coverage is applicable to the original purchaser and is not transferable We repair or at our option replace parts products that during normal usage and operation are proven to be defective during the time you own the products provided that said products and parts are still manufactured and or available Such repair replacement is subsequent to receipt of your product at our facility and our diagnostic evaluation and review of the unit Advance replacements are not provided as part of the warranty coverage This warranty does not cover damage to products caused by misuse mishandling power surges accident improper installation neglect alteration improper maintenance or other causes which are not normal and customa
116. Yes The device will restart No Click to undo any restart action 5 2 Firmware This section describes how to upgrade Firmware The switch can be enhanced with more value added functions by installing firmware upgrades 5 2 1 Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Web Interface To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Browser to select firmware in your device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 2 1 The Firmware update i Browse poaa Parameter description Browse Click the Browse button to search the Firmware URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button The switch will start to upload the firmware from firmware stored location PC or Server Gi Note This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Uploading software will update all managed switches to the location of a software image and click After the software image is uploaded a page announces that the firmware update is initiated After about a minute the firmware is updated and all managed switches restart The switch restarts WARNING While the firmware is being updated Web access appears to be defunct The front LED flashes Green Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function afterwards 246 SG72660
117. You can manage the switch over an Ethernet LAN or over the Internet 4 8 1 Configuration This section shows you how to configure the access management table of the Switch The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type matches any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch Web Interface To configure the Access Management Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Access Management Configuration 2 Click Add new entry 3 Specify the Start IP Address End IP Address 4 Check the Access Management method HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH in the entry 5 Click Save Figure 4 8 1 The Access Management Configuration ode Disabled v Delete StartIP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Add new emy _ Mode Disabled Start IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m o Do Add new entry Parameter description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry HTTP HTTPS Indicates that the host can access the
118. a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED LLDP MED is an extension of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC LOC is an acronym for Loss of Connectivity and is detected by an MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS M MAC Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for identifying which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports 264 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 MEP MD5 The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm
119. a number of columns which are o The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server The IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation O Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to O zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server The IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation O Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to O zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previou
120. a type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router Switch and IP Multicast Host can update the information of the Multicast table when a member port joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address With this function once a switch receives an IP multicast packet it will forward the packet to the members who joined a specified IP multicast group before The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets to the multicast group that had not been built up in advance IGMP mode enables the switch to issue IGMP functions that you enable as IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP 3 5 1 Basic Configuration This section describes how to set the basic IGMP snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Select enable or disable regarding Global Configuration 3 Select which ports are to become a Router Port or enable disable the Fast Leave function 4 Scroll to set the Throttling parameters 5 Click the Save button to save the settings 6
121. ace To display the detailed log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Syslog Detailed Log 2 Display the log information Figure2 5 3 The Detailed System Log Information Parameter description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry Message The detailed message of the system log entry Upper right icons Refresh clear etc You can click them to refresh the system log or to clear them manually Other icons are used for next up page or entry 22 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 6 SNMP Any Network Management System NMS running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP can manage the Managed devices equipped with the SNMP agent provided that the Management Information Base MIB is installed correctly on the managed devices The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between the SNMP manager and agent and traverses the Object Identity OID of the management Information Base MIB described in the form of SMI syntax The SNMP agent is running on the switch to respond to the request issued by the SNMP manager Basically it is passive except when issuing the trap information The switch supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent If the SNMP field is set to Enable the SNMP agent will be started up All supported MIB OIDs including RMON MIB can be accessed via the SNMP manager If the SNMP field is set to Disable the SNMP agent will be de activa
122. action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled o Mirror Specifies the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new ACE before the current row 50 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 Edits the ACE row Moves the ACE up the list O Moves the ACE down the list Deletes the ACE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings o Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the
123. alues for PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid values of DEI can be any values of 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type Possible values are Unicast UC Multicast MC Broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values Any Ethernet LLC SNAP IPv4 IPv6 DONE OLN NOTE All frame types are explained below 1 Any Allows all types of frames 2 Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid Ethernet types can have values within Ox600 OxFFFF or Any Default value is Any 3 LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any The default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any The default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OXFF or Any The default value is Any 4 SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have values within 0x00 0xFFFF or Any Default value is Any 5 IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y Z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to rig
124. and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources R RARP RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is an OAM functionality that is used by an MEP to indicate defects detected to the remote peer MEP RSTP In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1 w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP SHA SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It was designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representatio
125. assword The length of MD5 Authentication Password is restricted to 8 32 The length of SHA Authentication Password is restricted to 8 40 Privacy Protocol Allows you to set DES encryption for UserName Privacy Password The length of Privacy Password is restricted to 8 32 34 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Configuration This chapter describes all the basic network configuration tasks This includes the Ports Layer 2 network protocol e g VLANs QoS IGMP ACLs and PoE etc and any setting of the Switch 3 1 Port This section describes how to configure the port detail parameters of the switch including how to enable or disable the ports of the switch and how to monitor the ports for content or status functions 3 1 1 Configuration This chapter describes how to view the current port configuration and how to configure ports to non default settings including Linkup Linkdown Speed Current and configured Flow Control Current Rx Current Tx and Configured Maximum Frame Size Excessive Collision Mode Power Control Web Interface To configure any Current Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Configuration 2 Specify the Speed Configured Flow Control Maximum Frame Size Excessive Collision Mode and Power Control 3 Click Save Figure 3 1 1 The Port Configuration Speed Current Configured Auto y Auto Auto Flow Control Maximum Excessive Power C
126. atus and detail information Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Status 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click the Auto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Status Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Status Figure 3 6 4 The MLD Snooping Status Queries Queries Vi papon V2 Reports V1 Leaves ed Received di Rewii Parameter description VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry Querier Version The current working Querier Version Host Version The current working Host Version Querier Status Shows the Querier status as ACTIVE or IDLE Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number of Received Queries Vi Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received 92 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 The number of Received V2 Reports e V1 Leaves Received The number of Received V1 Leaves e Auto refresh Click the auto refresh button to refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Group Status manually Click Clear to clear the information 3 6 5 Group Information This section describes how to configure the MLD Snooping Groups Information The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the u
127. bally Disabled 210 Select Enabled in the Mode of Network Access Server Configuration Check Reauthentication Enabled Set Reauthentication Period Default is 3600 seconds Set EAPOL Timeout Default is 30 seconds Set Aging Period Default is 300 seconds Set Hold Time Default is 10 seconds Check RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled Check RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Restart Reauthenticate Reinitialize Reinitialize Reinitialize Reinitialize Reinitialize Reinitialize Reinitialize Reinitialize Reinitialize nticate Reinitialize thenticate Reinitialize Reinitialize SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Parameter description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames o Reauthentication Enabled If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Aging Period below o Reauthentication Period
128. bes how to set Single IP Web Interface To configure the Single IP in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Single IP 2 Set the parameters 3 Scroll to select the mode you want to set on the Single IP Disable Master Slave 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 18 1 The Single IP Configuration Single IP Configuration Mode Disabled Group Name Master Parameter description e Mode This parameter lets you disable the SIP function or set the device as a Master role or Slave role Possible modes are Disable Disable operation of Single IP Management Master Enable Single IP Management and to be a Master Switch The role is root User connects to the Master and can control the Slaves in the same SIP group Slave Enable Single IP Management and to be a Slave Switch The role is slave User connects to the switch that is a slave via Master management GUI e Group name This parameter lets you set the name of the Single IP group The available values are up to 64 characters describing group name o Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 18 2 Information This section describes how to display the Single IP information that has been set on the switch Web Interface To sho
129. cations and helps you create a more efficient better connected workforce The SG72660M web managed switch provides 26 ports in a single device The specifications are highlighted as follows e 12 features provide better manageability security QoS and performance e High port count design with all Gigabit Ethernet ports Supports guest VLAN voice VLAN Port based tag based and Protocol based VLANs Supports 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet standard Supports 8K MAC table Supports IPv6 IPv4 Dual stack Supports s Flow Supports Easy Configuration Port for implementation of IP Phones IP Cameras or Wireless environment Overview of User Manual Chapter 1 Operation of Web based Management Chapter 2 Maintenance 1 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Initial Configuration Operation of Web based Management This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the SG72660M switch through the web user interface With this facility you can easily access and monitor through any one port of the switch the status of any feature including MIBs status each port activity Spanning Tree status port aggregation status multicast traffic VLAN and priority status illegal access record and so on The default values of the SG72660M are listed in the table below IP Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 PSU e FLA NEVA 192 168 1 254 Username admin Password After
130. ce viii ELA OOO 1 CHAPTER 1 OPERATION OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT cssscsssssssssssscsscscesssssnesssenessesoeee 2 CONNECTING NETWORK DEVICES 0oocoocococccconocnconinonnconononnonnononncnnononncnnononnconononncnno noo a narco non eS 3 TWISTED PAIR DEVICES morno ia ecpesenseseutedsncpeaptandensed setpeaesseacesotsncpeapdaedersedseegeapeseaeetehsoepenenses 3 CABLING GUIDELINES hs ccc keratin ren Stn eden Gi Ai i dice lina nee 3 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION cssccscssssssscssesssscsssscesssssescsssnessssnescessssesssssnesssssesseses 4 2 1 SYSTEM INFORMATION eveshcoscsitedegsvesheesccstnideses seen taia iena eaea E ei paea E paee NEEE eSEE ese oa 4 DA ES ANA NN 4 21D CONPIQUTALION a e 7 A O A NN 8 A O OO 9 PASAS NY A A ES E US O TON 9 UPALNE Y APEE EEEE E E EE E EE EERTE EET Il 22S ACCOUNT ainia ide 12 DE Did USCS sis husk avea ve cosisdesus cvs E EEE E E EEEIEE 12 2 3 2 Privilege Levels iein eiaeiiai era eoa aae SEEE ado 14 DA E A EE E EE AE EE 17 DALMAU A A E E A ERE AE EEEE 17 DEAD I AU A A a EE ET 19 ZED SYSLOG E E di 20 2 5 1 Configuration tddi 20 DEN LIO A A a 21 23 3 D tailed LOBA AA A AA AAA DAA 22 DOS Mi 23 LOLAS OM A A AA Dd E EAE dd A dd 23 226 2 CONJIBUTOON dd A did A ddr 24 2263 ATA E E TA 25 220 4 USCIS A RA 26 ZO GOUDE A E A da 28 PR A EE cuss datsda cdindadecsdenhdas dues saddohet da sdued ods cevacbeesdi A ad coeatdedadeadesdineteen ss 29 220 7 ACCOSS 205 saa E RR NR 31 ZOO TO
131. ck LLDP Neighbors 2 Click Refresh for manual update of the web screen 3 Click Auto Refresh for auto update of the web screen Figure 3 8 2 The LLDP Neighbors information DI Retesh Local Chassis Remote Port System Port System System Management Port ID ID Name Description Capabilities Description Address Ne f Note If your network is without any device which supports LLDP then the table will show No LLDP neighbor information found Parameter description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other 2 Repeater 3 Bridge 4 WLAN Access Point 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 104 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by System Description System Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit Management Address Management Address is the
132. classification based on IEEE 802 1p Ethertype VID IPv4 IPv6 DSCP and UDP TCP ports and ranges The switch offers high flexibility in the classification of incoming frames to a QoS class The QoS classification looks for information up to Layer 4 including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP IPv4 TCP UDP port numbers and user priority of tagged frames This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS control list QCL The QoS class assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class The switch supports advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellent performance of all QoS classes under any traffic scenario including jumbo frame The switch also supports super priority queue with dedicated memory and strict highest priority in the arbitration The ingress super priority queue allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to the CPU even when all the QoS class queues are congested 3 14 1 Port Classification The section allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Classification 2 Scroll to select QoS class D
133. con to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the GVRP Global configuration information manually Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 148 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 13 2 Statistics The section describes to access the basic GVRP Port statistics for all switch ports The statistics relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GVRP Port Statistics in the web interface 1 Click GVRP Statistics 2 Scroll Select which port you want to display the GVRP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GVRP Statistics information Figure 3 13 2 The GVRP Port Statistics Port Join Tx Count Leave Tx Count es Parameter description eo Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can see port counters and statistics e Join Tx Count Explains Join Tx Count here e Leave Tx Count Explains Leave Tx Count here e Auto refresh Click the auto refresh icon to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the GVRP Port Statistics information manually 3 14 QoS The switch supports four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling It supports QoS Control Lists QCL for advance programmable QoS
134. configuration Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save Start Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Save Start 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 2 The Save Start configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Start Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Start Configuration 5 3 3 Save User This section describes how to save Users information Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save User Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Save User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 3 The Save as Backup Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Backup Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Backup Configuration 5 3 4 Restore User This section describes how to restore users information back to the switch Any current configuration files will be restored via XML format Web Interface To configure a Restore User Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Restore User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 4 The Restore the Backup Configuration Are you sure to restore the Backup Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to restore the Backup Configuration to
135. contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port O Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 3 2 LACP Ports using Link Aggregation Control Protocol according to IEEE 802 3ad specification as their trunking method can choose their unique LACP GroupID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using LACP is that a port makes an agreement with its peer port before it becomes a ready member of a trunk group also called aggregator LACP is safer than the other trunking method static trunk 3 3 2 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well An LACP trunk group with more than one ready member port is a real trunked group An LACP trunk group with only one or less than one ready member port is not a real trunked group Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation LACP parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Configuratio
136. d eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 4 2 Statistics This section describes to display the DHCP Relay Statistics information of the switch The statistics show both the Server and Client packet counters when DHCP Relay mode is enabled Web Interface To configure the DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Auto refresh button Figure 4 4 2 The DHCP Relay Statistics retos Jf cea Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad to Server Error from Server Agent Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Replace Keep Drop to Client Error from Client Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e Transmit to Server The number of packets that are relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients e Receive from Server The number of packets received from server e Receive Missing Agent Option The number of packets received without agent information options e Receive Missing Circuit 1D The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing e Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing e Receive Bad Circuit ID
137. d values in this case are also comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is a value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in a string is a hexadecimal value ranging from 0x00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if the value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then the value of PID will be etype Ox0600 Oxffff and if the value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then the valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry It consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 NOTE Special character and underscore _ are not allowed e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click to refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information manually 3 10 7 2
138. d with invalid CRC Rx Jabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear Click Refresh to refresh the Port Detail Statistics or Clear to clear them manually 40 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 1 5 Qos Statistics This section describes how the switch displays details about the QoS Queuing Counters for a specific switch port and for the different queues for all switch ports Web Interface To Display the Queueing Counters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then QoS Statistics 2 To auto refresh the information click Auto Refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the Queueing Counters or click Clear to clear all information Figure 3 1 5 The Queuing Counters Overview Bi Retest cee 2 2 2 2 x a x x E x 32 al 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 3 10 a pur SS SS SS SS Sia coc coco cocooooo 220000000000 2000o0ooooooc
139. de of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Save Figure 4 2 1 The ARP Inspection Configuration Mode Translate dynamic to static v o Disabled Disabled Disabled rt 4 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 Mode E Disabled 3 gt 9B 108 Parameter description e Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration Enables the Global ARP Inspection or disables the Global ARP Inspection e Port Mode Configuration Specifies ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled is ARP Inspection enabled on this given port eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 200 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Translate dynamic to static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries 4 2 2 Static Table This section describes how to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch You can use the Static ARP Inspection Table configuration to manage the ARP entries Web Interface To configure a Static ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address of the entry 3 Click Save Figure 4 2 2 The Static ARP Inspection Table Delete Port VLANID MAC Address IP Address Save Reset Delete Port VLANID MAC Address Los JE M1 Addn w
140. dia This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy 3 Guest Voice Supports a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signaling conditional For use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 5 Softphone Voice For use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance 6 Video Conferencing For use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video For use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treat
141. diagnosis It lets users know whether the system is healthly or needs to be fixed The basic system check includes ICMP Ping ICMPv6 and VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics 5 5 1 Ping This section allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMP PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMP PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMP PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 1 The ICMP Ping ICMP Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ping Size 64 Parameter description e IP Address The destination IP Address you want to ping e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds After pressing Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING6 server 10 10 132 20 10 10 132 20 10 10 132 20 10 10 132 20 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 64 bytes from 64 bytes from 64 bytes from 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms icmp_seq 1 time 0ms icmp_seq 2 time 0ms icmp_seq 3 time 0ms icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad 5 5 2 Ping6
142. ding date as well otherwise the daylight savings function will not be activated If you do not enable daylight savings then don t set the starting ending dates Time Set Offset Provides the Daylight Savings Time set offset The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 1 to 1440 minutes Default is 60 minutes Daylight Savings Type Provides the Daylight Savings type selection You can select By Dates or Recurring From Configures the Daylight Savings start date and time The format is YYYY MM DD HH MM To Configures the Daylight Savings end date and time The format is YYYY MM DD HH MM Gi NoTE The under from and to was displayed what you set on the From and To field information 10 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 2 2 NTP NTP is Network Time Protocol and it is used to sync the network time based on Greenwich Mean Time GMT If using the NTP mode select a built in NTP time server or manually specify a user defined NTP server as well as the Time Zone The switch will sync the time shortly after pressing the lt Apply gt button Though it synchronizes the time automatically NTP mode does not update the time periodically without the user s processing actions Time Zone is an offset time off GMT You have to select the time zone first and then perform time sync via NTP The switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time to
143. dynamic to static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries 4 1 2 Static Table This section describes how to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You can use the Static IP Source Guard Table configuration to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Static IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Save Figure 4 1 2 The Static IP Source Guard Table Delete Port VLANID IP Address MAC address Save Delete Port VLANID IP Address Delete 1 w Reset Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The Vlan Id for the settings IP Address The allowed Source IP address eo IP Mask It can be used for calculating the allowed network with IP address MAC address The Allowed Source MAC address e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and IP Mask for the new entry Click Save e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 198 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 4 1 3 Dynamic Table This section describes how to configure
144. e Refresh button to refresh the MAC based VLAN Memebership information manually 3 10 7 Protocol based VLAN This section describes Protocol based VLAN The Switch supports Ethernet LLC and SNAP Protocols LLC The Logical Link Control LLC data communication protocol layer is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer which is itself Layer 2 just above the Physical Layer in the seven layer OSI reference model It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX Decnet and Appletalk to co exist within a multipoint network and to be transported over the same network media and can also provide flow control and automatic repeat request ARQ error management mechanisms SNAP The Sub Network Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier spaces It is used with IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 4 IEEE 802 5 IEEE 802 11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers as well as with non IEEE 802 physical network layers such as FDDI that use 802 2 LLC 3 10 7 1 Protocol to Group This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the selected
145. e 1 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Unknown 204 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Active The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click the Refresh button to refresh the DHCP Snooping Port Statistics ma
146. e 3 11 1 The Voice VLAN Configuration Mode Disabled x VLAN ID 000 Aging Time 86400 seconds Traffic Class 7 High Parameter description e Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation You must disable MSTP feature before you enable Voice VLAN This can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation e VLANID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 e Aging Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will be based on hardware aging time The actual aging time will be situated between the age_time 2 age_time interval e Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply to this class e Port Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode is not disabled you must disable the MSTP feature before you enable Voice VLAN This can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is a VoIP phone attached to the
147. e 3 4 7 The STP Port status CISTRole CIST State Uptime Port 1 2 3 4 1 5 1 6 TN 8 9 10 A 12 13 N 14 Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port role of the CIST port The port role can be one of the following values Alternate Port Backup Port Root Port Designated Port Disabled e CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Blocking Learning Forwarding e Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized e Auto refresh To activate the auto refresh feature to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the STP Port status information manually 74 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 4 8 Port Statistics After you complete the STP configurations the switch can display the STP Statistics This section provides information how to display the STP Statistics detail counters of bridge ports in the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Port Statistics 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 8 The STP Statistics Transmitted Received Discarded MSTP RSTP STP TCN MSTP RSTP STP TCN Unknown Illegal Port Param
148. e MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number Parameter description Hash Code Contributors e Source MAC Address 56 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled e Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled e IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled e TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Aggregation Group Configuration e Locality Indicates the aggregation group type This field is only valid for switches Global The group members may reside on different units The device supports two 8 port global aggregations Local The group members reside on the same unit Each local aggregation may consist of up to 16 members e GroupID Indicates the group ID for the settings
149. e Multicast VLAN In a multicast television application a PC or a television with a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port r port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP join message to the switch to join the appropriate multicast Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source set the basic MVR Configuration and additional parameters in 1 Click Configuration MVR Configuration 2 Scroll the MVR mode to enable or disable and Scroll to set all parameters 3 Click Save to save the settings 4 If you wish to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 7 1 The MVR Configuration Port Mode Type 1 Receiver Y 2 Receiver Y Immediate Leave Disabled v Disabled 3 Disabled Y Receiver v Disabled 4 Disabled Y Receiver v Disabled 5 Receiver Y Disabled v 6 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled 7 Disabled v Receiver Y 8 Receiver Y 9 Receiver Y Disabled K Disabled y 10 Disabled Receiver v Disabled v a Disabled 11 Disabled y Receiver Y 2 Recher v Parameter description MVR Mode E Disabled y Disabled Enable Disable the Global MVR VLAN ID Speci
150. e the switch managed IP information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Web Interface To configure an IP address in the web interface 1 Click System IP Configuration 2 Specify the IPv4 settings and enable DNS proxy service if required 3 Click Save Figure2 4 1 The IP configuration Configured Current DHCP Client O IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 0000 0 0 0 0 T E DNS Server 0 0 0 0 DNS Proxy Save Reset J Parameter description e DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch in dotted decimal notation IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation SNTP Server Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 to 4095 DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT
151. eb Interface To configure the Spanning Tree CIST Ports parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree CIST Ports 2 Scroll and select to set all parameters of CIST Aggregated Port Configuration 3 Select to enable or disable the STP then scoll and select to set all parameters of the CIST normal Port configuration 4 Click the Save button to save the settings 5 If you wish cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 4 The STP CIST Port Configuration z 5 Restricted Point to Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Auto Edge Role TCN BPDU Guard point E 128 w Edge M a 2 O Forced True Y Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Auto Edge BPDU Guard s 1284 Edge 1281 Edge 128 Edge 128 Y Edge 128 w Edge 128 Edge 128 w Edge 128 Edge 128 Edge 128 iv Edge 128 Edge 128 Edge E3 EEE NE Es ES ES MERECES ENEE ES KJK Elsa YR IR LE E A HC EC E A E ele HH HB HHH ea aaa aaa ca aaa aa ca aa aaa aaa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 0A 9B 0B i lt jis RIR i Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port STP Enabled Controls whe
152. edirect of HTTPS Configuration 3 Click Save Figure 4 10 1 The HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Configuration Mode Enabled Automatic Redirect Disabled v Parameter description Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatically redirects web browser to HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation 4 11 Auth Method This page explains how to configure a user with authentication when he she logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces Web Interface To configure an Authentication Method Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Client console telnet ssh web which you want to monitor 2 Specify the Authentication Method none local radius tacacs 3 Check Fallback 4 Click Save Figure 4 11 1 The HTTPS Configuration Authentication Method Configuration Client Authentication Method Fallback console local v telnet local x ssh local v web local x Parameter description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values none authentication is disabled and login is
153. een 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update of the web screen Figure 3 9 4 The LLDP MED Neighbors information LLDP MED Neighbour Information Auto refresh C No LLDP MED neighbour information found Note If your network without any device supports LLDP MED then the table will show No LLDP MED neighbor information found Parameter description Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method m LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition LLDP MED Endpoint Devices as defined in TIA 1057 are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP MED framework Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the
154. elected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMPv3 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMPv3 Information Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next IGMPv3 Information Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address They will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over IGMPv3 Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently the system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to 128 Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny Auto refresh Select the auto refresh icon to refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Group Status manual
155. en a rule is matched such as Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging and Shutdown Figure 3 2 3 The Access Control List Configuration Refresh J Clear Remove All Port Redirect Ingress Port Policy Frame A Rate Bitmask Type Action Limiter Mirror Counter Action Rate Limiter i q Ingress Port Policy Filter Any Frame Type w Pot4 Y Mirror Logging Shutdown Aa Counter 0 802 10 Tagged VLAN ID Filter Tag Priority Reset Cancel Parameter description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress ports Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding
156. en sent to the plurality of ports pursuant to the forwarding map generated based upon whether the ingress port was configured as a protected or non protected port This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN Web Interface To configure Port Isolation configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Isolation 2 Select which port s you want to enable with Port Isolation 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 5 2 The Port Isolation Configuration Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 10A 9B 10 ajajaja a ajajajaja oo ey gt wo o 1 O ON Parameter description Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 130 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 10 6 MAC based VLAN A MAC address based VLAN decides the VLAN for forwarding an untagged frame based on the source MAC address of the frame The most common way of grouping VLAN members is by port hence the name port based VLAN Typically the device adds the same VLAN tag to untagged packet
157. er when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement an IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is designed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option is designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes representing the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal to the DHCP relay agent s MAC address DHCP Snooping DNS DoS DHCP Snooping is used to block an intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is a
158. ers A VLAN Name can leave blanks The length of a VLAN name supports up to 32 characters VLAN names can be edited for the existing VLAN entries O Port Members A row of check boxes for each port displays port members of each VLAN To include a port in a VLAN tick the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN group An empty row no port is a member and all boxes are unchecked is added to the table to configure o Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any change which is made before pressing Apply button Goesback to the previous group configuration e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click Refresh to refresh the VLAN entries manually Press lt lt or gt gt for previous or next page of the table 3 10 2 Ports User can configure all parameters for each port in VLAN Port Setting These parameters involve two parts Ingress rule and Egress rule The function of Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type and PVID affect Ingress process Furthermore Port Type Egress Rule and PVID affect Egress process Web Interface To configure VLAN Port configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN Port Configuration parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 2 The VLAN Port Configuration Port Port Type Ingress Filtering 1 Unaware
159. erver on the Dropped opped accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent Tx Requests radiusAccClientExtRequests to the server This does not include re transmissions TE The number of RADIUS packets Tx Retransmission radiusAccClientExtRetransmi re transmitted to the RADIUS s ssions E accounting server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or re transmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a re transmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout Pending radiusAccClientExtPendingRe E Requests quests Tx Timeouts radiusAccClientExtTimeouts Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4670 Name Description IP E IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in Address question State Round Trip Time radiusAccClientExtRoundTripTime 0 Buttons Shows the state of the server lt takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication
160. ess The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear lt lt gt gt Click Refresh to refresh the MAC address entries manually Click Clear to clear the MAC table entries Click lt lt or gt gt to move up or down the table NOTE 00 40 C7 73 01 29 Your switch MAC address for IPv4 33 33 00 00 00 01 Destination MAC for IPv6 Router Advertisement reference IPv6 RA JPG 33 33 00 00 00 02 Destination MAC for IPv6 Router Solicitation reference IPv6 RS JPG 33 33 FF 73 01 29 Destination MAC for IPv6 Neighbor Solicitation reference IPv6 DAD JPG 33 33 FF A8 01 01 Your switch MAC address for IPv6 global IP FF FF FF FF FF FF For Broadcast 3 10 VLAN 3 10 1 Purpose To assign a specific VLAN for management purposes The management of VLANs is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN This connection supports a VSM SNMP or Telnet session By default the active management VLAN is VLAN 1 but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN by configuring System gt IP gt IPv4 gt VLAN ID Only one management VLAN can be active ata time Figure 3 10 1 1 IP Configuration for Management VLAN Configured DHCP Client O IPAddress 191616177 IP Mask 25525
161. eter description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port eo STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port eo TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Auto refresh To activate the auto refresh feature to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click to refresh the STP Statistics information or clear manually 3 5 IGMP Snooping This function is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the member ports and in nature avoids wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are running over the network This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping cannot tell the multicast packet from the broadcast packet so it can only treat them all as the broadcast packet Without IGMP Snooping the multicast packet forwarding function is routine and nothing is different from broadcast packet A switch supporting IGMP Snooping with the functions of query report and leave
162. ets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response Rx a radius AuthClientExtBadAut packets containing invalid authenticators or ce henticators Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were Rx Unknown radiusAuthClientExtUnknow received with unknown types from the Types nTypes server on the authentication port and dropped The number of RADIUS packets that were Bx Packets radiusAuthClientExtPackets received from the server on the Dropped Dropped authentication port and dropped for some other reason i The number of RADIUS Access Request TX Snape eles SLC SME MING packets sent to the server This does not equests Requests oe include re transmissions Access The number of RADIUS Access Request TX Retransmissi a ecg packets re transmitted to the RADIUS etransmissions ae ons authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response Tx Pending radiusAuthClientExtPendin This variable is incremented when an Requests gRequest
163. etworking application Web Interface To configure a Port Description in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Port Description 2 Specify the detail Port alias or description using an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application 3 Click Save Figure 3 1 2 The Port Configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 0A 9B 0B gt Parameter description eo Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Description of device ports Description cannot include amp eo Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 1 3 Traffic Overview Port Statistics Overview O Port Packets Bytes Errors Drops Filtered Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received 4 7619 10650 1514026 3332717 0 0 0 0 29 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description O Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row eo Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port o Bytes
164. eue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 158 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 14 5 Port Tag Remarking This section provides the user with an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking fo
165. evious Generic Endpoint Class Class l and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class I and Media Endpoint Class Il classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support and inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighborhood unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD
166. exadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol tul is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 eo Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 to 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol tul is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 2 5 Syslog The Syslog is a standard for logging program messages It allows separation of the software that generates messages from the system that stores them and the software that reports and analyzes them It can be used as well for generalized informational analysis and debugging messages It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms 2 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure the system log and support a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms Web Interface To configu
167. ference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications FCC Caution CE mark Warning A A To assure continued compliance example use only shielded interface cables when connection to computer or peripheral devices Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the Following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This is a Class A device In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Note Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or instructions WARNING Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury CAUTION Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data or damage the system or equipment Table of Contents Revision History ran n a A Mule AE A E EE vededed ates duc savecsusdebestevyonesoaMessacevyanesaueaaniedeaesesia
168. following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class For example Any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also supports all aspects of TIA 1057 112 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class I and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class l m LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however but do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management m LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however but may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the pr
169. fy the Multicast VLAN Mode Enable MVR on the port Type ID Specifies the MVR port type on the port e Immediate Leave EnableDisable the fast leave on the port e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 98 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 7 2 Groups Information This section describes how to display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Web Interface To display the MVR Groups Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Groups Information 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click the Auto refresh button 3 Click the Refresh button to refresh an entry of the MVR Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 2 The MVR Groups Information BR Retest J gt Port Members VLAN ID Groups cE ANOS 10 11 12 Parameter description MVR Group Table Columns eo VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh Click the Auto Refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click Refresh to refresh the MVR Group information manually C
170. hange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string of the following form xx XX XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Sec
171. he DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contains one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 114 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 8 5 EEE Energy Efficient Ethernet By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency This latency occurs due to the circuits EEE turns off to save power need time to boot up before sending traffic over the link This time is called wake up time To achieve minimal latency devices can use LLDP to exchange information about their respective TX and RX wakeup time as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP Web Interface To show LLDP EEE neighbors 1 Click LLDP then click EEE to display EEE devices 2 Click Refresh for manual update of the web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update of the web screen Figure 3 8 5 The LLDP Neighbors EEE information LLDP Neighbors EEE Information Auto refresh C Local Port Tx Tw Rx Tw Fallback Receive Tw Echo Tx Tw EchoRx Tw Resolved Tx Tw Resolved Rx Tw EEE activated No LLDP EEE information found Note If your network does not have any devices with EEE function then the table will show No LLDP EEE information found Parameter description Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted o Tx Tw The link partner s maximum
172. he active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled 2 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 3 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error 248 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 5 3 Save Restore This section describes how to save and restore the switch configuration including Reset to Factory Defaults Save Start Save Users and Restore Users for any maintenance needs 5 3 1 Factory Defaults This section describes how to reset the switch configuration to Factory Defaults Any configuration files or scripts will recover to factory default values Web Interface To configure a Factory Defaults Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Factory Defaults 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 1 The Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Parameter description e Buttons Yes Click the Yes button to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click the No button to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration 5 3 2 Save Start This section describes how to save the Switch Start
173. he direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance Map Datum The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean Civic Address Location IETF Geopriv Civic Address based on Location Configuration Informatio
174. he switch supports the LLDP For current information on your switch model the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP provides a standards based method for enabling switches to advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP devices The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity capabilities and neighbors on an IEEE 802 local area network principally wired for Ethernet The protocol is formally referred to by the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards document IEEE 802 1AB 3 8 1 LLDP Configuration Each port individually can accommodate the LLDP configuration and the detail parameters The settings will take effect immediately This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings Web Interface To configure LLDP 1 Click LLDP configuration 2 Modify LLDP timing parameters 3 Set the required mode for transmitting or receiving LLDP messages 4 Specify the information to include in the TLV field of advertised messages 5 Click Save Figure 3 8 1 The LLDP Configuration Tx Interval fo seconds TxHold 3 _ times Tx Delay Tx Reinit Optional TLVs Mode CDP aware PortDescr SysName SysDescr SysCapa Mgmt Addr Disabled K El Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled IO IO IO oa SOEs HHH NHN DAR
175. he table Entries are removed from the table when a given port s link is down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value Org Discarded The number of organizationally received TLVs Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time for If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button tol refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click Refresh to refresh the LLDP Port Statistics information manually Click Clear to clear the entries 118 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 9 Filtering Data Base Filtering Data Base Configuration gathers many functions including MAC Table Information and Static MAC Learning MAC table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The s
176. here should be another view entry existing with view type as included and it s OID subtree should over ride the excluded view entry e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital numbers or asterisk o Save Click the Save icon to save the configuration to ROM 30 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 6 7 Access This function is used to configure the SNMPv3 accesses The Entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security level To create a new access account please check lt Add new access gt button and enter the access information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 14 Web Interface To display the configuration for SNMP Access in the web interface Click SNMP Accesses Click Add new Access Specify the SNMP Access parameters Click Save If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset NAGON Figure 2 6 7 The SNMP Accesses Configuration Security Security Delete Group Name Model pa O default_ro_group any NoAuth NoPriv O default_rw_group any NoAuth NoPriv Add new access Save AAA AAA Read View Name Write View Name default_view default_view vw default_view Delete Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry
177. ho typed a wrong account or password to login successfully when the user account is on the local authorization list of the local switch For example when user enters the wrong account or password TACACS server will refer to the account information on the local end of switch If the account is recorded on the local switch the user will be authorized to login with the privilege level set on the local switch e Accounting Enable this feature to record all the commands the user entered All the log data will be recorded on the server when enabled For instance login time log out time IGMP setting VLAN setting etc RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o E The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server The IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and
178. ht all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific values range of values or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes no any Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any Specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any Specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 6 IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of values or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any Specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any Specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Parameters Class QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification DP Valid DP Level can be 0 3 default basic classification DSCP Valid DCSP value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 e Buttons Apply Click to apply the configuration and move to main QCL page Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page without saving the configurat
179. i i s lle lla e EES ESS o z Enabled w E E E K i il KE Oo ON DH amp WH i 2 i t dl abled abl abled abled abled a Enabled Enabl Enabled abled abled abl EA o o i ESE ES ES n Eras Y Enanos Enabled a lens Y inated Y i Enated Y lena Y Zen 23 Enabled 24 Enabled i 2 ra i o E3 bl bled b bi bl Enabled vw bl bled b b bi bled o i SES ES ES i i 3 A i So o o Hi KIRK o e r ow M Figure 6 1 1 PoE Configuration 256 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Parameter description Power Supply Configuration e Primary Power Supply W The switch uses PoE power supplies as a power source This setting defines the maximum amount of power in watts that the supply can deliver Ethernet Port Configuration eo Port This is the logical port number for this row PoE State The PoE Mode represents the PoE operating mode for the port Disabled PoE disabled for the port Enabled Enables PoE IEEE 802 3af at Priority The Priority represents the port s priority There are three levels of power priority Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case where the remote device requires more power than the power supply can deliver In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off
180. i e aa a Ein 115 ISO Port Statisties e A Aaa era RDA EiS 117 32 9 FILTERING DATABASE iiaee E E E E E T E e a A E A E 119 3 9 1 CONFIG UPAT OM A E iassbiaca te cons S EEE REEE RE EEEE eE E aE S aea sek Sias 119 3 9 2 Dynamie MAC Taple ea aa E O A E aaea a E E EEEE RA SRE 121 J LO VEAN E RN 122 3 10 1 VLAN Membership siciccciccisscasscisseastetasatsessisesvesva guises assesbencasecees Sasna caen EEE TE E ERS e eea TERE Saet 122 IAO LS a e a E A a A E E a E E EE EEA 123 310 3 Swit h AUS A A Ad E E a aE aE EEAS 126 3 1 O 4 Port Status it AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA a E dated deg AAA AA AAA 127 3 10 5 Private VLANS voii naneo AE RE ae E S EV OAA E airada ds denise nds 129 3 10 5 1 Private VLANS Membership ooiococioncnonccooncnonocononcnornnoronanonanocnnr non oroncronnnocanonannnononona ro nnnc ano rear ncconos 129 3210522 A NANA 130 3 10 6 MAC based VLAN iii arnes 131 3 10 6 1 COM QUurati Ni a EAA R PA A EAR daa 3 10 6 2 ON 310 7 Protocol based VLAN arinena a a e E E o aa ER AER OS 3 10 7 1 Protocol to Group 310 7 2 Group to VEAN ar T e ra EE AE A EAE EE EA AE EEE Nae SR AE SSA EER R EE aR Aee nine 3 10 8 IEEE 802 1 QinQ double tag configuration IL VOCE VAN e erases hone ba ede eal a e eee a A ee SADA CONFI UPA ON A A A dd dit dd BHT DOL a AA AAA A e E a a i eet SL GARP our teeth eis Gen sarees antec aah bes eats le ete See sande dove E E Woe whe Pate Sette 3 12 1 Configuration ss enn A O SE PAIDOS ASTRO SAS VR ui oc A Configuration A RS O
181. ice requires an unshielded twisted pair UTP cable with RJ 45 connectors at both ends Use Category 5 5e or 6 cable for 1O00BASE T connections Category 5 or better for 1O0BASE TX connections The RJ 45 ports on the switch support automatic MDI MDI X pinout configuration Consequently you can use standard straight through twisted pair cables to connect to any other network device PCs servers switches routers or hubs See Appendix B for further information on cabling A CAUTION Do not plug a phone jack connector into an RJ 45 port This will damage the switch Use only twisted pair cables with RJ 45 connectors that conform to FCC standards CONNECTING TO PCS SERVERS HUBS AND SWITCHES Step 1 Attach one end of a twisted pair cable segment to the device s RJ 45 connector Figure 16 Making Twisted Pair Connections Step 2 If the device is a network card and the switch is in the wiring closet attach the other end of the cable segment to a modular wall outlet that is connected to the wiring closet See the section Network Wiring Connections Otherwise attach the other end to an available port on the switch Note Make sure each twisted pair cable does not exceed 100 meters 328 ft in length unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may nedrade overall performa nce for the segment attached to the hu Step
182. ideo 6 Control Signaling conditionally supports a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the policies that shall be mapped to the specific ports Application Type Intended use of the application types 1 Voice For use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by way of isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signaling conditional For use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice me
183. iderations Disabled Disables DHCP relay mode operation Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain Relay Information Mode Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes are Enabled Enables DHCP relay information mode operation When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled the agent inserts specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message when 206 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 transferring to DHCP client It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled Disabled Disables DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Policy Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled and agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information it will enforce the policy It only works under DHCP if relay information operation mode is enabled Possible policies are Replace Replaces the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Keep Keeps the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Drop Drops the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is receive
184. iguration of AAA in the web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Authentication Port for Radius Server Default is 1812 4 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Accounting Port for Radius Server Default is 1813 4 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a TACACS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for TACACS Server 3 Specify Authentication Port for TACACS Server Default is 49 4 Specify the Secret with TACACS Server Figure 4 5 3 1 The Common Server Configuration Figure 4 5 3 2 The TACACS Accounting Configuration Authorization Disabled Fallback to Local Authorization Accounting Figure 4 5 3 3 The RADIUS Configuration Enabled IP Address Hostname IP Address Hostname Parameter description Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe it will be considered to be dead and continue with the next enabled se
185. igure2 3 2 The Privilege Level configuration 14 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Group Name Privilege Levels Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE Easyport GARP GVRP IP IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED Loop Detection MAC Table Parameter description Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in detail System Contact Name Location Time Zone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance e Privilege Levels Every group has an authorization Privilege Level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege Level to have the access to that group 16 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision
186. ilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 the user can access all groups i e the user is granted full control of the device Other values refer to each group s privilege level The user s privilege should be the same or greater than the group privilege level to have access of that group By default settings most groups with privilege level 5 have the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access System maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc require user privilege level 15 Generally privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 is for a guest account G NOTE You can add up to 19 users in the Users Configuration You can configure up to 20 users total including admin account 2 3 2 Privilege Level This page provides an overview of the privilege levels The switch provides the following user Group Names Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE GARP GVRP IP IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring POE Ports Private VLANs QoS SFlow SMTP SNMP Security Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs and Voice VLAN Privilege Levels of 1 to 15 are available Web Interface To configure Privilege Level in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Privilege Level 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save F
187. in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is O to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click the Refresh button to refresh the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields Or click lt lt to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID Others click gt gt to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 3 5 3 Port Group Filtering This section describes how to set the IGMP Port Group Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature a user can exert this type of control In some network application environments such as the metropolitan or multiple dwelling unit MDU installations a user might want to control the multicast groups to which a u
188. ingle 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated o Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features
189. ings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host L LACP LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLC The IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC protocol provides a link mechanism for upper layer protocols It is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer and provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX to co exist within a multipoint network LLC headers consist of 1 byte DSAP Destination Service Access Point 1 byte SSAP Source Service Access Point and 1 or 2 bytes Control field followed by LLC information LLDP LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the station s point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by
190. ion change 170 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 14 11 QCL Status QoS Control List This section describes how to configure and display the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined A conflict exists if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the QoS Control List Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QCL Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then click the Auto refresh button 3 Scroll to select Combined Static Voice VLAN and Conflict 4 Click the Refresh button to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics Information Figure 3 14 11 The QoS Control List Status Combined Y esh L Resolve Conflict Refresh Action User QCE Frame Type Port Class DP DSCP Conflict Static 2 Any 24 7 8 10A 10B Class2 Default Default No Static 1 Any 5 10B Class 0 Default Default No Parameter description eo User Indicates the QCL user eo QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame types Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed LLC Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QC
191. ion describes how to import the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be imported as XML format Web Interface To configure an Import Config Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Browse to select the config file in your device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 4 2 The Import Config Jo Browse Pl Upload Choose File to Upload if mace_028 jpg E IMAGE _040 jpg E IMAGE 041 jpg i 2 GE 8 Ports PoE E SS eraki Fan issue ti p R eraki NAND flash Desktop j vi eraki NAND flash 5 EM EPL1000_v1 pdf 2 FG5 2528X PCBA Debug issue tracWigg table_20110902 xIsx Bice Smart Switches Feature List 092120 icrosoft Outlook BH ce Smart Switches Feature List_20111006 NuCR 3816 200 El as 235x series Chipeset data_20110901 xlsx LT E201 DYT Re El as 2326k PYT preparation meeting minutes table _20 901 xlsx SG5 2310G_HW Mi Compuier j Pot m SPEC xls FH pse5 23106_HW I IMAGE_027 jpg A psas 2352K LED Pi is Documents My Documents My Network File name Places Files of type All Files Parameter description eo Browse Click the Browse button to search the Configuration URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button The switch will start to upload the configuration from the configuration stored location in the PC or Server 252 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 5 5 Diagnostics This section provides a set of basic system
192. ionally To make it operational the receiver time out has to remain alive When operational the sample rate N is rounded off to the nearest possible value e Max Hdr Size Configures the size of the header of the sampled frame to be copied to the Queue for further processing The Max Header Size ranges from 14 to 200 bytes Default is 128 bytes e Polling Interval Configures the polling interval for the counter sampling It decides at what regular intervals the counter should be polled for statistics The accepted value for Counter Polling Interval ranges from 0 to 3600 seconds Default is O seconds which means polling is disabled e Buttons Edits the port sampler configuration Apply Click to save changes 180 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel the settings you have selected e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the sFlow Sampler information by manually 3 17 Loop Protection The loop protection feature is used to detect the presence of traffic When the switch identifies a packet s looping protection frame MAC address as the same as itself from the port Loop Protection happens The port will be locked when it receives the looping protection frames If you wish to re
193. iption of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP is used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not 260 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the serv
194. is forwarded custom port will be set When the port receives tagged frames to a self customized 1 If a tagged frame is TPID 0x88A8 it is value which can be set forwarded by the user using the 2 If the TPID of a tagged frame is not 0x88A8 ex column of Ethertype for 0x8100 it will be discarded Custom S ports Ingress Filtering Enables ingress filtering on a port by ticking the box If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN group of the frame the frame is discarded Do not forward However if ingress filtering is disabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN group of the frame the frame is still forwarded By default ingress filtering is disabled untick Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged untagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All Egress Rule Determines what device the port connect to If the port connect to VLAN unaware devices such as terminal work station Access link should be used If the port connect to VLAN aware devices for example switch connect to switch Trunk link should be used Hybrid link is used for more flexible application Hybrid If the tag of tagged frame is as the same as PVID the tag of the frame will be removed The frame bec
195. is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconas left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operation 232 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 4 7 Port Security This section explains how to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses 4 7 1 Limit Control This section explains how to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security fea
196. itch Web Interface To display the log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Syslog Log 2 Display the log information Figure2 5 2 The System Log configuration Level Al v Time M Switch just made a cold boot 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 El 10 1970 01 01 00 00 05 1970 01 01 00 26 08 1970 01 01 00 55 53 1970 01 01 01 47 14 1970 01 01 01 48 36 1970 01 01 02 20 04 1970 01 01 18 55 49 1970 01 01 19 58 11 1970 01 01 19 58 45 Link up on port 1 Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon so the device will refresh the log automatically e Level Level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e ID ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Time It will display the log record by device time The time of the system log entry Message It will display the log detail message The message of the system log entry Upper right icons Refresh clear etc You can click them to refresh the system log or to clear them manually Other icons are used for next up page or entry 2 5 3 Detailed Log This section describes the display for the detailed log information of the switch Web Interf
197. ity A guest equivalent identity can modify his password only Please note that you must confirm administrator guest identity in the field of Authorization in advance before configuring the username and password Only one administrator is allowed to exist and is unable to be deleted In addition up to 4 guest accounts can be created 2 3 1 Users This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser Web Interface To configure Account in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Users 2 Click Add new user 3 Specify the User Name parameter 4 Click Save Figure2 3 1 The Users Account configuration UserName Privilege Level min 15 Add new user_ User Settings pc a Password again Privilege Level AOS Y Parameter description User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores Password Enter a password The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 12 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 e Password again Enter the password again You must type the same password again in this field e Privilege Level The priv
198. k the Auto refresh icon to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click the Refresh button to refresh the Access Management Statistics information manually Click the Clear button to clean up all entries 4 9 SSH This section explains how to use SSH Secure SHell to securely access the switch SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication Web Interface To configure an SSH Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of SSH Configuration 2 Click Save Figure 4 9 1 The SSH Configuration Mode Save Reset Parameter description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 242 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 4 10 HTTPs This section explains how to use HTTPS to securely access the switch HTTPS is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication via the browser Web Interface To configure an HTTPS Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of HTTPS Configuration 2 Select Enabled in the Automatic R
199. kbps Web Interface To configure ACL Rate Limiter in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Rate Limiter 2 Specify the Rate field and the range from 0 to 3276700 3 Scroll and select the Unit with pps or kbps 4 Click Save to save the setting 5 If you wish to cancel the setting then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 2 2 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ue oa no is uo nel oo ES no ao oo is Seve J Reset Parameter description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or O 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second eo Buttons Apply Click Save to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 48 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 2 3 Access Control List This section describes how to configure Access Control List rules An Access Control List ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria The SG72660M switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be acce
200. lected Counters e Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following administrative states e Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Attached MAC Addresses e Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth e MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module o State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t succes
201. licable to configure the Get Community and the Set Community for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 Web Interface To configure SNMP Communities in the web interface Click SNMP Configuration Specify the parameters of Get Community and Set Community Scroll to Enable or Disable the function of the Set Community Click Apply If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset NADN Figure2 6 2 SNMP Configuration SNMP Configuration Get Community public Set Community private Enable v Parameter description e Get Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with the SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure a security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to the community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet e Set Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to the SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when the SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c e Mode Indicates the Set Community mode operation Possible modes are E
202. lick lt lt for previous page entry Click gt gt for next page entry 3 7 3 Statistics This section describes how the switch will display the MVR detail Statistics once the MVR has been configured on the switch It provides the detail MVR Statistics Information Web Interface To display the MVR Statistics Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Statistics 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click the Auto refresh button 3 Click the Refresh button to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry Figure 3 7 3 The MVR Statistics Information V1 Reports V2Reports V3Reports V2Leaves Received Received Received Received VLAN ID 0 0 0 0 Parameter description VLANID The Multicast VLAN ID e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves e Auto refresh Click the Auto Refresh button to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click the Refresh button to refresh the MVR Group information manually Click the Clear button to clear the information 100 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 8 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol T
203. lities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch 102 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 O NoTE When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but happens when the hold time is exceeded Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 8 2 LLDP Neighbors This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP neighbors 1 Cli
204. ls are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of the security level cannot be modified if the entry already exists This means it must first be ensured that the value is set correctly e Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are None No authentication protocol 26 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol The value of the security level cannot be modified if the entry already exists This means it must first be ensured that the value is set correctly e Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication password phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocols are None No privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy password phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and
205. lt value is kbps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 14 4 Port Shaping This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shaping for all switch ports The user can access all detailed information of the ports belonging to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Shapers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Shapers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Shapers Figure 3 14 4 The QoS Egress Port Shapers Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Shapers Scheduler Mode Strict Priority Queue Shaper 1500 kbps i 156 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 If you select the scheduler mode with weighted then the screen will change as shown in the figure 500 kbps ak ass za pr a N x x Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers e Shapers Qn Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Shapers Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Qu
206. lue is trusted e QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 3 e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 14 8 DSCP Translation This section describes how to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress Web Interface To configure the DSCP Translation parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the Ingress Translate and Egress Remap DPO and Remap DP1 parameters 3 Select to enable or disable Classify 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 8 The DSCP Translation Configuration 3 o g m m KRIEK ereere fN aD Elo pad O on i a EA ES ls Bl 10 AF11 RE 0 24 wl N a Els BLE te x iieii iii KIRIK jii olos RIKER RIRIK iz isi csn wfiles csn ml TE H10 AF11 4 10 AF11 ES NEMENIEA can a s T i 63 63 164 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Parameter description e DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values i
207. lue of O represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1 D 2004 DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of O represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Adding a new policy Click to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Save Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Port The port number to which the configuration applies Policy Id The set of policies that shall apply to a given port The set of policies is selected by check marking the checkboxes that correspond to the policies Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 8 4 LLDP MED Neighbors This page provides a status overview of all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP MED neighbor 1 Click LLDP MED Neighbor 2 Click Refresh for manual update of the web scr
208. ly Others for are next up page or entry 86 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 6 MLD Multicast Listener Discovery Snooping Curiously enough a network node that acts as a source of IPv6 multicast traffic is only an indirect participant in MLD snooping it just provides multicast traffic and MLD doesn t interact with it Note In an application like desktop conferencing a network node may act as both a source and an MLD host but MLD interacts with that node only in its role as an MLD host A source node creates multicast traffic by sending packets to a multicast address In IPv6 addresses with the first eight bits set that is FF as the first two characters of the address are multicast addresses and any node that listens to such an address will receive the traffic sent to that address Application software running on the source and destination systems cooperates to determine what multicast address to use Note that this is a function of the application software not of MLD When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts MLD snooping enabled Listener MLD host a uy Source SO I fo Listener MLD host 3 6 1 Basic Configura
209. m Location Parameter description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character The first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 2 1 3 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samples are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG Web interface To configure System Information in the web
210. management page appears When you login to the SG72660M switch Web UI management you can use both ipv4 ipv6 login to manage To optimize the display effect we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6 0 above Netscape V7 1 above or FireFox V1 00 above and have the resolution 1024x768 The switch supports neutral web browser interface NOTE Gi The SG72660M function enables dhcp so If you do not have a DHCP server to provide ip addresses to the switch the switch default ip address is 192 168 1 1 Figure 1 The login page Connect to 192 168 1 1 The server 192 168 1 1 at GEL2 ESW26K requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name admin Password Remember my password Gi Note If you need to configure a function or parameter then you can refer to the information in the User Manual Or you could access the switch and click the help under the web GUI The switch will pop up the simple help content to assist you with setting the parameters or functions Any configuration changes made to the switch must be saved in the start configuration in order to be applied to the next start up sequence Go to Maintenance gt Save Restore gt Save Start shown in Section 5 3 2 SG72660M web help function 1 GEL2 ESW26K va OFF
211. many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as the destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as the destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality e MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exc
212. me used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Resolved Rx Tw The resolved Rx Tw for this link Note NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual rx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the LLDP Neighbors information manually 116 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 8 6 Port Statistics Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch Web Interface To show LLDP Statistics 1 Click LLDP than click Port Statistics to show LLDP counters 2 Click Refresh for manual update of the web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update of the web screen 4 Click Clear to clear all counters Figure 3 8 6 The LLDP Port Statistics information Global Counters Auto refresh C Clear Neighbour entries were last changed at 2011 01 01 00 00 00 4945 sec ago Total Neighbours Entries Added 0 Total Neighbours Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbours Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP Statistics Local Counters Local Pot TxFrames RxFrames RxErrors Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 0 c0o0o0o0oo0oooooo c0o
213. ment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling conditional For use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag A Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that 110 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A va
214. ments This function is based on a defined sampling rate An average of 1 out of N packets operations is randomly sampled This type of sampling does not provide a 100 accurate result but it does provide a result with quantifiable accuracy Web Interface To configure the sFlow Agent in the web interface 1 Click Configuration sFlow Agent sampler 2 Click the e to edit the sFlow sampler parameters 3 Scroll to Sample Type to select None Tx Rx or All 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 2 The sFlow sampler Configuration Flow Sampling Counter Sampling E Is Sampler Type Sampling Rate Max Hdr Size Polling Interval 1 1 None 0 128 0 2 1 None 0 128 0 3 1 None 0 0 4 1 None 0 1 5 1 None D 0 sFlow Port 1 sFlow Instance 1 Sampler Type Sampling Rate Max Hdr Size Polling Interval 0 save Jf Rese J corea Parameter description e sFlow Ports List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured e sFlow Instance Configured sFlow instance for the port number e Flow Sampling Packet flow sampling refers to arbitrarily choosing some packets out of a specified number reading the first Max Hdr Size bytes and exporting the sampled datagram for analysis The attributes associated with the flow sampling are sa
215. mpler type and sampling rate e Sampler Type Configured sampler type on the port It can be any of the followingtypes None Rx Tx or Al l You can scroll to select the sampler type By default the value is None e Sampling Rate Configured sampling rate on the ports e Max Hdr Size Configured size of the header of the sampled frame e Counter Sampling Counter sampling performs periodic time based sampling or polling of counters associated with an interface enabled for sFlow Attribute Associated with counter sampling is polling interval e Polling Interval Configured polling interval for the counter sampling Parameter description e sFlow Ports This is the port number on which sFlow can be configured e sFlow Instance Multiple instances of sFlow can be supported on the port Currently one sFlow instance is supported on each port Sampler Type Sampler type on the port can be one of the following types None RX TX or ALL If type is None then the sampling rate is 0 and no other value is accepted The default value is None e Sampling Rate Determines the rate at which samples must be taken on the ports If sampling rate is configured as N 1 N frames are sampled The sampling rate ranges from 0 to 4095 Default value is 0 meaning sampling is disabled on the port If receiver time out is 0 sec this sFlow configuration is disabled operat
216. n 2 Enable or disable the LACP on the ports of the switch Scroll the Key parameters with Auto or Specific Default is Auto 3 Scroll the Role with Active or Passive Default is Active Click Save to save the settings 5 If you wish to cancel the setting then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values S Figure 3 3 2 1 The LACP Port Configuration Port LACP Enabled Key Role 1 O 2 0 gt An gt D N 5 O 6 O Auto po Active 7 O __ 8 O __ s oO __ 10 O O Auto ov po Active o Auto OOO Parameter description Port 58 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 The switch port number LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Butto
217. n Civic Address LCI Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture County County parish gun Japan district City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan Block Neighborhood Neighborhood block Street Street Examples Maple Main Leading street direction Leading street direction Examples N S Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Drive House no House number Example 21 House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming John Zip code Postal zip code Example 19256 108 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 e Building Building structure Example Low Library eo Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Floor Example 4 e Room no Room number Example 450F e Place type Place type Example Office e Postal community name Postal community name Example Leonia e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example
218. n an Ethernet frame F FTP FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features Fast Leave Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously This processing applies to IGMP and MLD HTTP HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that is used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates
219. n known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length Shaper Ashaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail SNAP The Sub Network Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values It also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network 268 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer SSID Service Set Identifier is a
220. n acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer host names into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connections an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation DSCP Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes E EEE EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az EPS EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported i
221. n is used to enable the switch to send out the trap information while pre defined trap events occurred Web Interface To configure the Trap Event Severity Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Trap Event Severity Configuration 2 Scroll to select the Group name and Severity Level 3 Click Save to save the settings 4 If you want to cancel the setting then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 21 1 The Trap Event Severity Configuration Group Name Severity Level ACL ACL Log Access Mgmt Auth Failed Cold Start Config Info Firmware Upgrade Import Export LACP Link Status Login Logout Mgmt IP Change Module Change NAS Passwd Change Port Security Thermal Protect VLAN Warm Start Parameter description e Group Name The name identifying the severity group Severity Level Scroll to select a severity level on each group The following level types are supported lt 0 gt Emergency System is unusable lt 1 gt Alert Action must be taken immediately lt 2 gt Critical Critical conditions lt 3 gt Error Error conditions 192 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 lt 4 gt Warning Warning conditions lt 5 gt Notice Normal but significant conditions lt 6 gt Information Information messages lt gt Debug Debug level messages e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert t
222. nabled Enables Set Community Disabled Disables Set Community 24 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 6 3 Communities The function is used to configure SNMPv3 communities The Community and User Name is unique To create a new community account please check lt Add new community gt button and enter the account information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 4 Web Interface To display the configuration of SNMP Communities in the web interface Click SNMP Communities Click Add new community Specify the SNMP communities parameters Click Save If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset aPN Figure2 6 3 The SNMPvi v2 Communities Security Configuration Delete Community UserName Source IP Source Mask TL Ad new community Delete Community User Name Source IP Source Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Aroi amesema Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next apply e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as a security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string o User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry belongs to The length of User Name string is restricted to 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCI
223. name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM SSM In SyncE This is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and contains a QL indication STP Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI Layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsolete by RSTP SyncE SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 T TACACS TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing device
224. nd voice quality
225. neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the LLDP Neighbors Information manually 3 8 3 LLDP MED Configuration Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP known as LLDP MED that provides the following facilities Auto discovery of LAN policies such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated Services Diffserv settings enabling plug and play networking Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and in the case of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Enhanced 911 services Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet PoE end points Inventory management allowing network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics manufacturer software and hardware versions serial or asset number This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED This function applies to VolP devices which support LLDP MED Web Interface To configure LLDP MED 1 Click LLDP MED Configuration 2 Select Fast start repeat count parameter The default is 4 3 Select Coordinates Location parameters 4 Select Civic Address Location parameters 5 Select Add new policy
226. ng Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups Save Reset Delete Port Filtering Groups mal 209 x Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port 80 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 To select the port for enabling the IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering function e Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 5 4 Status After you complete the IGMP Snooping configuration the switch can display the IGMP Snooping Status This section provides instructions for how to display the IGMP Snooping detail status on the switch Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then select the Auto Refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Snooping Status 4 Click Clear to clear the IGMP Snooping Status Figure 3 5 4 The IGMP Snooping Status V1 Reports V2Reports V3Reports V2Leaves Received Received Received Received Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version The current working Querier Version e Host Version The current working Host Version e Querier Status Shows the Querier status
227. nly IPv6 frames can match this ACE Note The IPv6 frames won t match the ACE with Ehternet type e Action Specifies the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Rate Limiter Specifies the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Redirect Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled Mirror Specifies the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Indicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Note The System Log memory size and logging rate are limited Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Counter The counter indicates
228. ns Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 3 2 2 System Status This section describes how once the LACP functions have been set the switch provides a status overview for all LACP settings Web Interface To display the LACP System status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP System Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to click Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP System Status Figure 3 3 2 2 The LACP System Status O Res Partner Partner Last Local gor ib SystemID Key Changed Ports T No ports enabled or no existing partners Parameter description e AggrID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation setting For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of the aggregation for this switch The format is Switch ID Port e Auto refresh To refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the LACP systems status information manually 60 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 3 2 3 Port Status This section describes how once the
229. nterface To configure the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN ID with entries per page 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry Figure 3 7 2 The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLANID Snooping Enabled MLD Querier Compatibility RV Ql sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1sec URI sec 1 Y Save Parameter description eo VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Snooping Enabled Enables the per VLAN MLD Snooping A maximum of 32 VLANs can be selected o MLD Querier Enables the MLD Querier in the VLAN A router sends MLD Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Querier e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection are MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 and Forced MLDv2 The default compatibility value is MLD Auto Oo Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 The default robustness variable value is 2 eo QI Query Interval The Query Interval is the inter
230. ntrol This section allows the user to configure the Storm Control for the switch There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch Web Interface To configure the Storm Control Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Storm Control Configuration 2 Select the frame type to enable storm control 3 Scroll to set the Rate Parameters 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 12 The Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Enable Rate pps Unicast Multicast Broadcast Parameter description Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here Unicast Multicast or Broadcast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type eo Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps e Bu
231. nually Click the Clear button to clear the entries 4 4 DHCP Relay This section describes how to forward DHCP requests to another specific DHCP server via DHCP relay The DHCP server may be on another network 4 4 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure DHCP Relay settings including Relay Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Server IP setting Relay Information Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Information Mode Policy Replace Keep and Drop Web Interface To configure a DHCP Relay in the web interface 1 2 3 4 5 Select Enabled in the Relay Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Specify the Relay Server IP address Select Enabled in the Relay Information Mode of the DHCP Relay Configuration Specify the Relay Information Policy Replace Keep and Drop in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Click Save Figure 4 4 1 The DHCP Relay Statistics DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Disabled x Relay Server 0 0 0 0 Relay Information Mode Disabled v Relay Information Policy Replace Parameter description Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enables DHCP relay mode operation When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain The DHCP broadcast message won t be flooded for security cons
232. o 200000000000 x O0O0O0O0O0O0OOOooco 200000000000 ccoo co6ccococcoocoo X O0O0O0O0O0O0OO0O00oos occ c c o6ccocococoe alalelslslelslolelsiel Ej 2co0ooooooooooo alslalslolelelslelsioloEs ococococooccococ e alalelelelelelelelslelels 200000000000 BI Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Qn Qn is the Queue number QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically e Upper right icon Refresh clear Click refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters or click Clear them manually 3 1 6 SFP Information This section describes how the switch displays the detail information about the SFP modules which are installed in the switch The information includes Connector type Fiber type Wavelength Baud Rate Vendor OUI etc Web Interface To Display the SFP information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then SFP Information 2 SFP Information is shown Figure 3 1 6 The SFP Information Overview SFP Information for Port 11 Connector Type SFP LC Fiber Type Multi mode MM Tx Central Wavelength 850 Baud Rate 1000 Mbps Vendor OUI 00 40 c7 Vendor Name VERSITRON Vendor PN SER EC Vendor Rev 8403110262 Vendor SN 0000 Date Code 080409 Temperature none Vcc none Mon1 Bias none
233. o previously saved values 3 22 SMTP Configuration This function is used to set an Alarm trap When the switch alarms you can set the SMTP server to send you the alarm mail Web Interface To configure the SMTP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration SMTP Configuration 2 Scroll to select the Severity Level 3 Specify the parameters in each blank field 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 22 1 The SMTP Configuration SMTP Configuration Mail Server User Name Password Serveriry Level Info v Sender Return Path Email Address 1 Email Address 2 Email Address 3 Email Address 4 Email Address 5 Email Address 6 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SMTP Configuration page e Mail Server Specify the IP Address of the server transferring your email e Username Specify the username on the mail server e Password Specify the password on the mail server e Sender To set the mail sender name e Return Path To set the mail return path as sender mail address e Email Address 1 6 Email address es that you would like to receive the alarm message e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 194 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 23 UPnP
234. ome an untagged frame and transmitted Any other tagged frame whose tag value is different from PVID are transmitted directly Trunk all tagged frames with any tag value are transmitted Access The tag of any tagged frame will be removed to become an untagged frame These untagged frames will be transmitted PVID Configures the Port VLAN identifier The allowed values are 1 through 4094 The default value is 1 When the port receives an untagged frame the port will give a tag to it based on the value of PVID and the frame becomes a tagged frame NoTE The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID 3 10 3 Switch Status The function Switch Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVR Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP or Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN membership status n the web interface 1 Click VLAN Membership 2 Specify as Static NAS MVRP MVR Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Or Combined 3 Display membership information Figure 3 10 3 The VLAN Membership Status for Static User VLAN Membership Status for Combined users Combined Auto reffesh Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN ID 1 4 5 6 7 8 94 10A 98 108 1 Kanaa A A y Parameter description VLAN USER You can scroll to select one kind of VLAN User as below
235. ommunication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port 270 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic a
236. on 3 Select Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 4 Click Save Figure 4 1 1 The IP Source Guard Configuration 196 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Mode Disabled v Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients 1 Disabled Unlimited w 2 Disabled v Uniimites 3 Disabled Unlimited 4 Dias fonemes o7 5 Disabled Unlimited 6 Disabled Unlimited a 7 Disabled v Unlimited Mv 8 9 Unlimited x 10 Unlimited Y 11 E A 13 ar C 14 Disabled vw Unlimited Parameter description e Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration Enables the Global IP Source Guard or disables the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Configuration Specifies on which ports IP Source Guard is to be enabled Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled is IP Source Guard enabled on a given port Max Dynamic Clients Specifies the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port This value can be 0 1 2 or unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0 it means only allow IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Translate
237. onym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provide directory service and security features UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a check sum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP User Priority VLAN User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as PCP Virtual LAN A method to restrict c
238. ork topology 3 4 1 Bridge Settings This section describes how to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge and STP System settings It allows you to configure STP System settings used by all STP Bridge parameters in the Switch Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree Bridge Settings parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Bridge Settings 2 Scroll to select the parameters and enter available value of parameters in blank field in Basic Settings 3 Click to enable or disable the parameters and enter available value of parameters in blank field in Advanced settings 4 Click the Save button to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 1 The STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Maximum Hop Count jos Transmit Hold Count be Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery Port Error Recovery Timeout Parameter description Basic Settings Protocol Version The Spanning Tree Protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of
239. ort 8 The uplink port port 8 can be set as C Port or S Port The uplink port on both switches must be set to the same Type We set S Port to S Port as example Q in Q belongs to the tag based mode however it will treat all frames as the untagged ones which means that those tagged with PVID will be added into all packets Then these packets will be forwarded as Tag based VLAN Therefore the incoming packets with tag will become the double tag ones 140 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 11 Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specifically for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality 3 11 1 Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI Web Interface To configure Voice VLAN in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Voice VLAN Configuration 2 Specify VLAN ID Aging Time and Traffic Class 4 Specify Port Mode Security and Discovery Protocol in the Port Configuration 5 Click Save Figur
240. oups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situations In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom With Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Por
241. ovides a Port Statistics overview for all LACP settings Web Interface To display the LACP Port Statistics status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then click the Auto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics Figure 3 3 2 4 The LACP Statistics O retest J LACP LACP Discarded Port Received Transmitted Unknown Illegal Sonona wna 20o0o0o0ooooocooo ococoocosocos 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port e Auto refresh Click to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click to refresh the LACP port statistics information or clear manually 62 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 4 Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP feature can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STP compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any
242. ows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown e Re open Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section NoTE Clicking the Re open button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost e Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the Port Security Limit information manually e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 2 Switch Status This feature shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this
243. page any changes made locally will be undone Clear Click to clear the counters Remove all Click to remove all ACEs Parameter description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies All The ACE applies to all ports Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port e Policy Filter Specifies the policy number filter for this ACE Any No policy filter is specified policy filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE choose this value Two fields for entering policy value and bitmask e Policy Value When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy value The allowed range is 0 to 255 e Policy Bitmask When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy bitmask The allowed range is 0x0 to Oxff Frame Type Selects the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to 0600 hexadecimal ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Note The ARP frames won t match the ACE with Ethernet type IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Note The IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with Ethernet type IPv6 O
244. pical Application VLANs 100 200 Customer X Site A Etherne E f N J Fe Customer Port VLAN 40 l f Eiai a AAA Port a wa eo mn ae Customer I VLAN 20 VLANs 100 200 Customer X Site B racing Er os A ON Service Provider Infrastructure Ethernet CID Header VLAN 40 Port Core Port Core Port VLANs 40 20 VLANs 40 20 peepee te tt tte j SES RTUES SEE rd VLAN aN j j i Frun Core Port Customer Port Ethernet Header VID 100 Data Ethernet Header JHE j J Ethernet Header VID 100 f C yor Se E Site C m Site D Core Port Service Port VLANs 100 200 VLANs 100 200 138 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 An abstract illustration to above application __ Configure Steps Step 1 Create VLAN 20 and VLAN 40 Configure Port 3 Port 4 and Port 8 are assigned to VLAN 20 Configure Port 1 Port 2 and Port 8 are assigned to VLAN 40 Port 8 is an uplink port The above setting is configured at SW1 Left side and SW2 Right side Step 2 Configure PVID Port 1 and Port 2 are PVID 40 and their port roles are VLAN access mode Port 3 and Port 4 are PVID 20 and their port roles are VLAN access mode The port role of Port 8 is VLAN trunk mode Step 3 Configure Port Type to Unaware at Port1 Port 4 Step 4 Configure Port Type to S Port at P
245. point in the MLDv2 Information Table Web Interface To display the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping IPv6 SSM Information 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click the Auto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The IPv6 SSM Information MLDv2 Information Autoseesh L Retesh J e gt Start fom VLAN 1 and Group 00 wit 20 entres per page VLANID Group PortNo Mode Source Address Type No more entries Parameter description MLDv2 Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address The IP Address of the source Currently the system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to 128 Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny 96 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 7 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration The MVR feature enables mu configured as an MVR receive ports 3 7 1 Configuration This section describes how to the switch Web Interface To configure the MVR Configuration in the web interface Iticast traffic forwarding on th
246. pt disabled in the event a loop is detected and the port action is to shut down the port Valid values are O to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart 182 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Port No The switch port number Enable Controls whether Loop Protection is enabled on this switch port Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only Tx Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 17 2 Status This section describes how to display the Loop Protection Status that has been set on the switch and explains the Loop Protection Status parameters Web Interface To display the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Loop protection Status 2 Select Enable or Disable for the Auto Refresh feature 3 Click the Refresh button to clear or update the record of Loop Protection Figure 3 17 2 The Loop Protection Status Port Action Transmit Loops Status Loop Time of Last Loop 1 Shutdown Enabled 0 Up Shutdown Enabled Down Shutdown Enabled Down Shutdown Enabled Down Shutdown Enabled Down Shutdown Enabled
247. pted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match the frame is accepted Other actions can also be invoked when a matching packet is found including rate limiting copying matching packets to another port or to the system log or shutting down a port This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on the SG72660M switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted The order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest Web Interface To configure the Access Control List in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Configuration 2 Click the O button to add a new ACL or use the other ACL modification buttons to specify the editing action i e edit delete or moving the relative position of entry in the list 3 Specify the parameter of the ACE 4 Click Save to save the setting 5 If you wish to cancel the setting then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 6 When editing an entry on the ACE Configuration page note that the Items displayed depend on various selections such as Frame Type and IP Protocol Type Specify the relevant criteria to be matched for this rule and select set the actions to take wh
248. ption Port State Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Oo Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Port Counters e EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Force Authorized 220 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth e Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Se
249. ption o Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range from 1 to 200000000 eo Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port costs See above e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 72 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 4 6 Bridge Status After you complete the MSTI Port configurations the switch can display the Bridge Status This section provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information Web Interface To display the STP Bridges status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Bridges 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 6 The STP Bridges status Root
250. r all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Tag Remarking in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Tag Remarking Figure 3 14 5 The Port Tag Remarking Click the Port index to set the QoS Port Tag Remarking Tag Remarking Mode Ena Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e Tag Remarking Mode Scroll to select the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel the changes 3 14 6 Port DSCP The section will teach the user how to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration that was allowed to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port DSCP parameters in the web interface 1
251. rames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS Excessive Collision Mode Configures port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled Enabled Both link up and link down power savings enabled Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them to refresh the Port link Status manually 36 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 1 2 Port Description This section describes how to configure the Port s alias or any descriptions for the Port Identity It provides the user with the ability to write down an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and n
252. re Syslog configuration in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Syslog 2 Specify the syslog parameters including IP address of Syslog server and Port number 3 Evoke the Syslog to enable it 4 Click Save Figure2 5 1 The System Log configuration System Log Configuration Server Mode Disabled v Server Address 1 Server Address 2 Syslog Level Info v Parameter description e Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will be sent out to the syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 The syslog server will not send acknowledgments back to the sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always be sent out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enables server mode operation Disabled Disables server mode operation e Server Address 1 and 2 Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server 1 and server 2 For redundancy If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will be sent to the syslog server Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors 20 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 2 5 2 Log This section describes the display for the system log information of the sw
253. re based on the type of devices to be connected to the switch ports Scroll to select what kind device you want to connect and implement with the Easy Port setting 188 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Access VLAN To set the Access VLAN ID It means the switch port access VLAN ID AVID The allowed range is 1 to 4095 VLAN Mode Scroll to select the Port Egress Rule The allowed values are Hybrid Trunk or Access This parameter affects VLAN egress processing If Trunk is selected a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames transmitted on the port This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN aware switches If Hybrid the default value is selected and if the classified VLAN ID of a frame transmitted on the port is different from the Port VLAN ID a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in the frame If Access is selected all frames transmitted on the port are untagged Voice VLAN Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 If you connect an IP Phone you need to assign the Voice VLAN ID Traffic Class Scroll to select the traffic class for the data stream priority The available values are from 0 Low to 7 High If you want the voice have a high priority then set the value to 7 Port Security
254. require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signaling For use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined TAG TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged or Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type There are eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP DSCP is t
255. rottling Enables limiting the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 5 2 VLAN Configuration This section describes the VLAN configuration setting process integrated with the IGMP Snooping function Each settings page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the appropriate button in the upper right corner will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Select enable or disable Snooping and IGMP Querier Specify the parameters in the blank field 3 Click Refresh to update the data or click lt lt or gt gt to display previous entry or next entry 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you wish to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 2 The IGMP Snooping VLA
256. rver if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 sub intervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the sub interval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined to be dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured 224 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration e Authorization Every CLI command will be authorized by the TACACS server when enabled The authorization table on the TACACS server is able to configure which CLI command can pass successfully For example TACACS server is set to accept STP command but deny VLAN command The server will block the command related to STP when entered by the user but it can allow VLAN command to configure successfully when the user enters a VLAN command Fallback to Local Authorization Enable this feature to allow the user w
257. rwarded or influenced in some way The ACLs are divided into EtherTypes IPv4 ARP protocol MAC and VLAN parameters etc Here we will just go over the standard and extended access lists for TCP IP As you create ACEs for ingress classification you can assign a policy for each port The policy number range is 1 8 however each policy can be applied to any port This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will be 3 2 1 working with Ports This section describes how to configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE Web Interface To configure the ACL Ports Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Ports 2 Scroll the specific parameter values and select the desired value for port ACL settings 3 Click the Save button to save the setting 4 If you wish to cancel the setting then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values al After the ACL Ports Configuration is complete you can view the Counter of the port It is then possible to click Refresh to update the Counter or click Clear to clear the information Figure 3 2 1 The ACL Ports Configuration ACL Ports Configuration Policy Acon Rate Port ID Limiter ID Redirect a lt gt v lt gt v Pot 1 Pot2 M MENE Permit Disabled Port 1 Pot2
258. ry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address It will use the last entry of those currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over MLD Snooping Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports in this group 94 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 e Auto refresh Select Auto refresh to refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click Refresh to refresh the MLD Snooping Groups Information manually Click lt lt for previous page entry Click gt gt for next up page or entry 3 6 6 IPv6 SSM Information Source Specific Multicast This section describes how to configure the entries in the MLDv2 Information Table The MLDv2 Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Number Different source addresses belonging to the same group are treated as a single entry Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLDv2 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information Table the default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLDv2 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting
259. ry applications of the products and for which they were not intended No other warranty is expressed or implied and VERSITRON is not liable for direct indirect incidental or consequential damages or losses In the unlikely event a warranty issue should arise simply contact us at 302 894 0699 or 1 800 537 2296 or via email at fiberlink versitron com to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number along with instructions for returning your product 11 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 Copyright Purpose Audience Conventions Warranty Disclaimer FCC Warning About This Manual Copyright VERSITRON Inc All rights reserved The products and programs described in this guide are licensed products of VERSITRON Inc This manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright and all accompanying hardware software and documentation are copyrighted No parts of this manual may be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable from by any means by electronic or mechanical It includes photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use and without the prior express written permission of VERSITRON Inc This manual gives specific information on how to operate and use the management functions of the switch The manual is intended for use by network administrators who are respon
260. s Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 90 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 6 3 Port Group Filtering This section describes how to configure the Port Group Filtering in the MLD Snooping function This feature permits adding a new filtering group and safety policy Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface Click Configuration MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Click the Add new Filtering Group 1 2 3 Specify the Filtering Groups with entries per page 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you wish to cancel the settings then you click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 7 3 The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups Add new Filtering Group J Save Delete Port Sae Parameter description e Delete Select to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port The logical port for the settings Select to enable the port to join the Filtering Group eo Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 6 4 MLD Snooping Status This section describes how once the MLD Snooping configurations are completed to display the MLD Snooping St
261. s 0 e Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP e All Classify all DSCP 160 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 eo Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of the following parameters e Disable No Egress rewrite e Enable Rewrite enable without remapped e Remap DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 14 7 DSCP Based QoS This section provides information how to configure the DSCP Based QoS mode This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches Web Interface To configure the DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Based QoS 2 Select to enable or disable the DSCP for Trust 3 Scroll to select the QoS Class and DPL parameters 4 Click Save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 7 The DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Configuration 162 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Parameter description e DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 e Trust Click to check if the DSCP va
262. s 64 and the valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Ingress The Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation 1 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 2 Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side eo Egress The following are configurable parameters for Egress side 1 Remap DPO From the menu select the DSCP value you want to remap DSCP values range form 0 to 63 2 Remap DP1 From the menu select the DSCP value you want to remap DSCP values range form 0 to 63 The following is the configurable parameter for Egress side e Remap From the menu select the DSCP value you want to remap DSCP values range form 0 to 63 eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 14 9 DSCP Classification This section describes provides information on how to configure and map a DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the DSCP Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the DSCP Parameters 3 Click Save to save the settings 4 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset
263. s Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or re transmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different Tx Timeouts radiusAuthClientExtTimeout server or give up A retry to the same S server is counted as a re transmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name Description IP IP address and UDP port for the authentication server in Address question Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access State E attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the Round radiusA
264. s blocked on the port If no user modules are enabled on the port a dash will be shown Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh icon to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the Port Security Switch Status information manually 4 7 3 Port Status This feature shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port which you want to monitor 2 Check the Auto refresh Figure 4 7 3 The Port Security Port Status Port Security Port Status Port 4 Port Autotefiesh C MAC Address VLANID State Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Parameter description e MAC Address amp VLAN
265. s enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page MAC Count Current Limit The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Indicates the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well a
266. s that are received through the same port Later on these packets can be forwarded in the same VLAN Port based VLAN is easy to configure and applies to networks where the locations of terminal devices are relatively fixed As mobile office and wireless network access gain more popularity the ports that terminal devices use to access the networks are very often non fixed For example A device may access a network through Port A this time but through Port B the next time If Port A and Port B belong to different VLANs the device will be assigned to a different VLAN the next time it accesses the network As a result it will not be able to use the resources in the old VLAN On the other hana if Port A and Port B belong to the same VLAN after terminal devices access the network through Port B they will have access to the same resources as those accessing the network through Port A which can cause security concerns To provide user access and ensure data security in the mean time the MAC based VLAN technology was developed MAC based VLANs group VLAN members by MAC address With MAC based VLAN configured the device adds a VLAN tag to an untagged frame according to its source MAC address MAC based VLANs are mostly used in conjunction with security technologies such as 802 1X to provide secure flexible network access for terminal devices 3 10 6 1 Configuration The MAC based VLAN entities can be configured here This page allows for adding and
267. s via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET TFTP UDP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TFTP is an acr
268. sement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval of one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Chapter 4 Security This chapter describes all of the switch security configuration tasks to enhance the security of local network including IP Source Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping AAA etc 4 1 IP Source Guard This section describes how to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch You can use the IP Source Guard configuration to enable or disable the Ports of the switch 4 1 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure the IP Source Guard settings including Mode Enabled and Disabled Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited Web Interface To configure an IP Source Guard Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configurati
269. ser on a switch port can belong It allows the user to control the distribution of multicast services such as IP TV based on some type of subscription or service plan With this feature you can filter multicast joins on a per port basis by configuring IP multicast profiles and associating them with individual switch ports An IGMP profile can contain one or more multicast groups and specifies whether access to the group is permitted or denied If an IGMP profile denying access to a multicast group is applied to a switch port the IGMP join report requesting the stream of IP multicast traffic is dropped and the port is not allowed to receive IP multicast traffic from that group If the filtering action permits access to the multicast group the IGMP report from the port is forwarded for normal processing IGMP filtering controls only IGMP membership join reports and has no relationship to the function that directs the forwarding of IP multicast traffic Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering 2 Click Add New Filtering Group 3 Scroll the Port to enable the Port Group Filtering Specify the Filtering Groups in the blank field 4 Click Save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the settings click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 3 The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filteri
270. ser to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table the default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Group Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Group Information 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click the Auto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Group Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Groups Information Figure 3 6 5 The MLD Snooping Groups Information Dy Retest lt lt J gt gt Port Members VLAN ID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Parameter description Navigating the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table the default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest MLD Group Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed ent
271. sfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds o Last Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click the Refresh button to refresh the NAS Statistics manually Click Clear to clean up all entries 222 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 4 6 AAA This section explains how to use an AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting server to provide access control to your network The AAA server can be a TACACS or RADIUS server to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers 4 6 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure AAA settings of TACACS or RADIUS servers Web Interface To configure a Common Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Set Timeout Default is 15 seconds 2 Set Dead Time Default is 300 seconds To configure a TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Authorization 2 Select Enabled in the Fallback to Local Authorization 3 Select Enabled in the Accounting To configure a RADIUS Authentication Server Conf
272. sible for operating and maintaining network equipment consequently it assumes a basic working knowledge of general switch functions the Internet Protocol IP and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The following conventions are used throughout this manual to show information A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your VERSITRON Inc product can be obtained from VERSITRON Inc VERSITRON Inc does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose VERSITRON Inc disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of VERSITRON Inc VERSITRON Inc assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this manual and makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this manual VERSITRON Inc reserves the righter to make improvements to this manual and or to the products described in this User Manual at any time without notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the CE FCC remove Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter
273. sly saved values 226 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 4 6 2 RADIUS Overview This section explains the overview feature of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Servers Status This to ensures the function is working properly Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Overview Configuration in the web interface 1 Check Auto refresh button Figure 4 6 2 The RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Retesh IP Address 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 1 2 3 zi 3 IP Address 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 Parameter description The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses
274. ss frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is
275. st prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both Private VLAN PTP QCE QCL QL QoS In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes the QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual applications QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE This is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in an SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video
276. sume the locked port please determine the looping path and remove off the looping path Then select the resume the locked port and click on Resume to turn on the locked ports 3 17 1 Configuration This section describes how to set Loop Protection Web Interface To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Loop Protection Configuration 2 Select Enable or Disable port Loop Protection 5 Click Save to save the settings 6 If you want to cancel the setting then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 17 1 The Loop Protection Configuration eneral Settings Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Transmission Time ls Shutdown Time 180 Action A 917 8 Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Enable E i oa D Ss J i o a Shutdown Pot Enable Y Shutdown Port ES m ES ii opa EE Oo OD Oo oD dale i lal le m RI Parameter description e Enable Loop Protection Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole e Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port Valid values are 1 to 10 seconds e Shutdown Time The period in seconds for which a port will be ke
277. switch Web Interface To configure Protocol based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click Protocol based VLAN Configuration and Add new entry 2 Specify the Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol and Group Name 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 7 1 The Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Value Group Name No Group entry found Save Hl Reset J Delete Frame Type Value Group Name Ethemet Etype 0x 0800 Add new entry EE Parameter description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 134 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected eo Value Valid values that can be entered in this text field depend on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for the three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type are called etype Valid values for etype range from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid values in this case are comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Vali
278. switch from HTTP HTTPS interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry SNMP Indicates that the host can access the switch from the SNMP interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry TELNET SSH Indicates that the host can access the switch from the TELNET SSH interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 240 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 4 8 2 Statistics This section displays detailed statistics of the Access Management including HTTP HTTPS SSH TELNET and SSH Web Interface To configure an Assess Management Statistics in the web interface 1 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 8 2 The Access Management Statistics fetes ce Interface Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Parameter description e Interface The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch e Received Packets Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Allowed Packets Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Discarded Packets Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Auto refresh Clic
279. switch ports The Port Policing is useful in constraining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates Policing is primarily useful for data flows and voice or video flows because voice and video usually maintains a steady rate of traffic Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Policing 2 Select which ports need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers and enter the Rate limit condition Scroll to select the Rate limit unit with kbps Mbps fps and kfps Click Save to save the configuration Figure 3 14 2 The QoS Ingress Port Policers Configuration QoS Ingress Port Policers Port Mode Rate Unit Flow Control 500 lt gt O 1 C 500 kbps i m 500 kbps O 3 500 kbps O 4 500 kbps 5 O 500 kbps v O S m 500 kbps O 7 O 500 kbps O o m 500 kbps O 9 500 kbps v a 10A 500 kbps 98s O 500 kbps 10B O 500 kbps O Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers e Mode Select which Ports you need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers function Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port o Rate Controls the rate for the policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted
280. t Qn Shows the weight for this queue and port Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted 154 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The defau
281. t S port and S custom port Ingress action Egress action Unaware When the port receives untagged frames an The TPID of frame untagged frame obtains a tag based on PVID transmitted by Unaware The function and is forwarded port will be set to of Unaware When the port receives tagged frames 0x8100 can be used 1 If the tagged frame is TPID 0x8100 it becomes for 802 1QinQ a double tag frame and is forwarded double tag 2 If the TPID of tagged frame is not 0x8100 ex 0x88A8 it will be discarded C port When the port receives untagged frames an The TPID of frame untagged frame obtains a tag based on PVID transmitted by C port and is forwarded will be set to 0x8100 124 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 When the port receives tagged frames 1 If a tagged frame is TPID 0x81 00 it is forwarded 2 If the TPID of a tagged frame is not 0x8100 ex 0x88A8 it will be discarded S port When the port receives untagged frames an The TPID of frame untagged frame obtains a tag based on PVID transmitted by S port and is forwarded will be set to 0x88A8 When the port receives tagged frames 1 If an tagged frame is TPID 0x88A8 it is forwarded 2 If the TPID of a tagged frame is not 0x88A8 ex 0x8100 it will be discarded S custom port When the port receives untagged frames an The TPID of frame untagged frame obtains a tag based on PVID transmitted by S and
282. t if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses IGMP Querier IMAP Arouter sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client
283. t is ASCII characters 28 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 from 33 to 126 2 6 6 Views This function is used to configure the SNMPv3 view The Entry index keys are OID Subtree and View Name To create a new view account please check lt Add new view gt button and enter the view information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 28 Configure the SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree Web Interface 1 Click SNMP Views 2 Click Add new View 3 Specify the SNMP View parameters 4 Click Save 5 If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset Figure 2 6 6 The SNMP Views Configuration Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree DO default_view A Save o Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree Loewe ines O OOOO OO Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 eo View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view types are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded In general if a view entry s view type is excluded t
284. tatic entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 3 9 1 Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the Static MAC Table here Web Interface To configure MAC Address Table in the web interface Aging Configuration 1 Click Configuration 2 Specify the Disable Automatic Aging and Aging Time 3 Click Save MAC Table Learning 1 Click Configuration 2 Specify the Port Members Auto Disable Secure 3 Click Save Static MAC Table Configuration 1 Click Configuration and Add new static entry 2 Specify the VLAN ID Mac Address and Port Members 3 Click Save Figure 3 9 1 The MAC Address Table Configuration Disable Automatic Aging C Port Members Delete VLANID MAC Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 s 9a 10a 98 108 s new static env Saw Port Members MAC Address 1j2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9a 10A 98 108
285. ted and the related Community Name Trap Host IP Address Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored 2 6 1 System This section describes how to configure the SNMP System on the switch This function is used to configure SNMP settings community name trap host and public traps as well as the throttle of SNMP An SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community names then it can access the MIB information of the target device So both parties must have the same community name Once completing the setting click the lt Apply gt button the setting takes effect Web Interface To display the configuration of the SNMP System in the web interface 1 Click SNMP System 2 Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function 3 Specify the Engine ID 4 Click Apply Figure2 6 1 The SNMP System Configuration SNMP System Configuration SNMP State Enable Disable Engine ID s00007eso171000001 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SNMP System Configuration page eo SNMP State The term SNMP here is used for the activation or de activation of SNMP Enable Enable SNMP state operation Disable Disable SNMP state operation Default Enable e Engine ID SNMPv3 Engine ID Syntax 0 9 a f A F min 5 octet max 32 octet fifth octet can t input 00 Note Changing the Engine ID will clear all original users 2 6 2 Configuration There are two communities by default It is app
286. ted it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports e Auto refresh Select the Auto Refresh icon to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the VLAN entries manually 126 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 3 10 4 Port Status The Port Status function gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVR Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP or Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN Port Status n the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Status 2 Specify Static NAS MVRP MVR Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP or Combined 3 Display Port Status information Figure 3 10 4 The VLAN Port Status for Static User O reten Port PVID Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type TxTag UVID Conflicts 1 UnAware Disabled Untag This 1 UnAware i Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This UnAware Disabled Untag This Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row eo PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed
287. teria are used e The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet e The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 e Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and
288. the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You can use the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table configuration to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID IP Address and entries per page 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 1 3 The Dynamic Table a Port VLANID IP Address MAC Address No more entres Parameter description Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted e IP Address User IP address of the entry e MAC Address Source MAC address e Auto refresh Click the Auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click to refresh the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table manually Others are for next up page or entry 4 2 ARP Inspection This section describes how to configure the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch You can use the ARP Inspection configuration to manage the ARP table 4 2 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure the ARP Inspection settings including Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Enabled and Disabled Web Interface To configure an ARP Inspection Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration 2 Select Enabled on the specific port in the Mo
289. the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values VLAN Parameter description 802 1Q Tagged Specifies whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are Any Any value is allowed don t care Enabled Tagged frame only Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any VLAN ID Filter Specifies the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care 52 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears Tag Priority Specifies the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is O to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don tcare 3 2 4 ACL Status This section describes how to display the ACL status for different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined A conflict exists if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the ACL status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then ACL status 2 If you wish to auto refresh the information then click the A
290. ther STP is enabled on this switch port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI e
291. there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y clients are unauthorized o Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh Click refresh to refresh the NAS Configuration manually
292. tion This section provides instructions how to configure the MLD Snooping basic configuration and the parameters Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Click to enable or disable the Global configuration parameters Select the ports to join Router Port and Fast Leave 3 Scroll to select the Throttling mode with unlimited or 1 to 10 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you wish to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 6 1 The MLD Snooping Basic Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled 0 Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding Enabled MLD SSM Range fe Proxy Enabled go Port Router Port FastLeave Throttlin gt n unlimited Y unlimited unlimited au O unlimited 5 unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited Y OOOOOOOO0O0O00 OOOOOOOO00000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 0A 9B 0B Parameter description e Snooping Enabled Enables the Global MLD Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding enabled Enables unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Please note that disabling unregistered IPMCv 6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery e MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers to run the SSM service model for the groups in the
293. to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps e Unit Scroll to select what unit of rate kbps Mbps fps and kfps The default is kbps e Flow Control Select to enable or disable flow control on port Buttons 152 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 14 3 Port Scheduler This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Schedulers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Schedulers Figure 3 14 3 The QoS Egress Port Schedules Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Schedulers E Pee Caa Pe Oe Pr E Sa if iw ii U Jae F ul t Y if a CS Pa i a E EN ee E as eee ya pe E ER MER la ea tse a lO Pee Le Pp 600 te Pik E TIS a a is a If you select the scheduler mode with weighted then the screen will change as shown in the figure F H500 kbps Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port Weigh
294. to a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 70 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 3 4 5 MSTI Ports This section describes how the user can view the current STP MSTI port configurations and make changea them as well An MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying the actual MSTI port configuration options It contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Port Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Ports 2 Scroll to select the MSTI or other MSTI Port 3 Click Get to set the detail parameters of the MSTI Ports 4 Scroll to set all parameters of the MSTI Port configuration 5 Click Save to save the settings 6 If you wish to cancel the settings click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 5 The MSTI Port Configuration ey o Na da as sl 3 ial a aoe ETY m 8 ER Parameter descri
295. to configure the mode and or mapping DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Note DP level Every incoming frame is classified to a Drop Precedence Level DP level which is used throughout the device for providing congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific DP level PCP PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame DEI DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag Actual PCP is PRI column in VLAN tag packet DEI is CFI column PCP value is from 0 7 It can be used for priority definition DEI value is O or 1 It is settable map to DP value is O or 1 When ingress QoS class value is the same then use DP level value to define the priority Larger DP values will be dropped first ex From Port 1 input 1G Pkts Egress Port 7 Rate is set with 500M Port 1 Pkts will include two kinds of packets a PCP amp DEI 00 via configured map to Qos class amp DP level 1 0 b PCP amp DEI 01 via configured map to Qos class amp DP level 1 1 Result will find a Packets all passed and b Packets all dropped 3 14 2 Port Policing This section provides an overview of QoS Ingress Port Policers for all
296. to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 10 The QoS Control List Configuration i Action Se ea save Parameter description e QCE Indicates the index of QCE eo Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for in incoming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame types Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e First three octet byte of MAC address e DMAC Specifies the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frames Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowed The default value is Any eo VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4094 or Any PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any e DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value
297. ts The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will only apply though if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in the 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to assure that switching is done bidirectionally in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Aggregation Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability
298. ttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 15 Thermal Protection This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current setting for controlling thermal protection Thermal protection is used to protect the chip from getting overheated 3 15 1 Configuration This section describes how to inspect and configure the current setting for controlling thermal protection Thermal protection is used to protect the chip from getting overheated When the temperature exceeds the configured thermal protection temperature ports will be turned off in order to decrease the power consumption It is possible to arrange the ports with different priorities Each priority can be given a temperature at which the corresponding ports shall be turned off Web Interface To configure the Thermal Protection in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Thermal Protection Configuration 2 Specify the temperature in the priority 0 to 3 3 Scroll to set the Priority 4 Click Save to save the settings 5 If you want to cancel the setting then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 1 The Thermal Protection Configuration Parameter description Temperature settings for priority groups The temperature at which the ports with the corresponding priority will be turned off eo Priority 174 SG72660M amp SG7
299. ture to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of System Configuration 2 Checked Aging Enabled 3 Set Aging Period Default is 3600 seconds To configure a Port Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Port Configuration 2 Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses in the Limit of Port Configuration 3 Specify Action Trap Shutdown Trap amp Shutdown 4 Click Save Figure 4 7 1 The Port Security Limit Control Configuration Re open Reopen Reopen e a 0 Parameter description System Configuration eo Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality
300. urity Limit Control functionality e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked on a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assignea 214 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which
301. urrent Rx Current Tx Configured Frame Size Collision Mode Control X 9600 Discard E Disabled v 9600 Discard Disabled v 9600 Discard Disabled 9600 Discard Disabled Y 9600 Discard W Disabled v 9600 Discard Disabled Y 9600 Discard Disabled Y 9600 Discard Disabled v 9600 Discard E Disabled v 9600 Discard Disabled Y 9600 9600 E x EANEANEA ES EM ES Ea ERES 1Gfdx Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down sa aaa aaa aa E iae e eS EJEA Link 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E Parameter description Port This is the logical port number for this row Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Auto Speed selects the highest speed that is compatible with a link partner Disabled disables the switch port operation Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause f
302. using the range from 1 to 8 Otherwise the queue will postpone the transmission until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted Click the Save button to save the settings If you want to cancel the settings then click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values as Figure 3 1 7 The EEE Configuration EEE Configuration EEE Urgent Queues Port EEE Enabled 1 21 91 549 580 6 7 8 1 O ajajajaja jajaa 2 O ajajajaja jajaa 3 O ODODODOO 4 O ajajajaja jajaa 5 O ajajajaja jajaa 6 O ajajajaja jajaa 7 O ae eee A 8 O ajajajaja jajaa 9 O ajajajaja ja jaa 10 O ajajajaja jajaa 44 SG72660M amp SG72660MP Revision A3 Parameter description EEE Port Configuration The EEE port settings relate to those currently selected as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the logical EEE port EEE Enabled Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port e EEE Urgent Queues Queues selected will activate transmission of frames as soon as any data is available Otherwise the queue will postpone the transmission until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 2 ACL The SG72660M switch access control list ACL is probably the most commonly used object in the IOS It is used for packet filtering and also for selecting types of traffic to be analyzed fo
303. uthClientExtRoundT most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Trip Time ripTime Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement 230 SG72660M SG72660MP Revision A3 is 100 ms A value of O ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet RADIUS Accounting Statistics The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description The number of RADIUS packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS packets received from the server Rx Malformed radiusAccClientExtMalformed eel ats ae PESO AOS Responses authenticators or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server The number of RADIUS packets of radiusAccClientExtUnknownT unknown types that were received radiusAccClientExtResponse Rx Responses K Bad radiusAcctClientExtBadAuthe Fi Authenticators nticators Rx Unknown Types ypes from the server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that Rx Packets radiusAccClientExtPacketsDr were received from the s
304. uto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh the ACL Status Figure 3 2 4 The ACL Status Configuration ACL Status Combined Autowefresh L User Ingress Port Frame Type Action RateLimiter PortCopy Mirror CPU CPUOnce Counter Conflict Loop Detection Any ARP Deny 2 Disabled Disabled Yes No 0 No Static Policy 1 ARP Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled No No 34 No Static Any Any Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled No No 479 No Parameter description User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress ports Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped
305. val between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds The default query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval This is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is O to 31744 in tenths of seconds The default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds The default Last Listener Query Interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds The default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Group Status manually Select lt lt or gt gt for previous or next up page or entry Buttons Save Click to save change
306. values such as VLAN Identifiers with each other In doing so the attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN and these devices form a j reachabilityj tree that is a subset of an active topology GARP defines the architecture rules of operation state machines and variables for the registration and de registration of attribute values A GARP participation in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component and a GARP Information Declaration GID component associated with each port or the switch The propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a bridge is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation GIP component Protocol exchanges take place between GARP participants by means of LLC Type 1 services using the group MAC address and PDU format defined for the GARP application concerned 3 12 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GARP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GARP Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click GARP configuration 2 Specify GARP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 12 1 The GARP Port Configuration GARP Port Configuration Auto refresh O Port a il Leave All Applicantion pred GARP Applicant Timer Timer 1 200 soo
307. values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Port Type Shows the Port Type Port type can be any of Unaware C port S port or Custom S port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom S port is S port with Custom TPID Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering on a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN the frame is discarded Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID A port s UVID determines the packets behavior at the egress side Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN Membership or VLAN Port Configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules e Auto refresh Select the Auto Refresh icon to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the VLAN Port Status information manually 128 SG726
308. ven if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influencing the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transmits frequently BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well Point to Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than
309. vice start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbor has been detected in order to share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbors receiving the LLDP frame With Fast Start Repeat Count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Coordinates Location Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify t
310. w the Single IP in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Single IP and then information 2 Click Refresh manual or Auto refresh automatic update of information Figure 3 18 2 The Single IP information form afresh L Refresh Index ModelName MAC Address PTT GEL2 ESW10 00 40 c7 73 00 d9 GEL2 ESW10 LIY Refresh Model Name GEL2 ESW10 System Description 8 Port 10 100 1000Base T 2 100 1G SFP L2 Plus Managed Switch GEL2 ESW10 2011 01 01 00 55 11 Dd 00 55 11 v1 00 v1 23 ical Version v1 01 v1 01 Series Number 033706000002 Host IP Address 192 168 20 23 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Host MAC Address 00 40 c7 73 00 d9 Baud ize Parameter description e Index The ID of the active Slave Switch This parameter lets you know how many slave devices connect to the SIP group e Model name Displays the model name of the Slave Switch This parameter lets you know what kind of device is joined to this SIP group MAC Address Displays the Ethernet MAC address of the Slave Switch This parameter lets know the device s MAC address that is joined to this SIP group o Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto Refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Gi Note When you click the index you will redirect to the slave device and perform the switch configuration or display management for the device 186 SG72660M amp
311. width of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment to build the bandwidth aggregation For example if there are three Fast Ethernet ports aggregated in a logical port then this logical port has a bandwidth three times as high as a single Fast Ethernet port 3 3 1 Static Trunk Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique Static Group ID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using the Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port This is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group may not know that they should be aggregated together to form a logic trunked port Using Static Trunk on both ends of a link is strongly recommended Please also note that low speed links will stay in not ready state when using static trunk to aggregate with high speed links Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation Hash mode and Aggregation Group in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Static Trunk and then Aggregation Mode Configuration 2 Enable or disable the aggregation mode functions Select Aggregation Group ID and Port members 3 Click Save to save the settings 4 If you wish to cancel the settings then click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 3 1 1 The Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Sourc

Manual PDF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents